Panasonic | SXPR54M | Operating instructions | Panasonic SXPR54M Operating Instructions

SX-PR54/M ENGLISH
DIGITAL ENSEMBLE
SX-PR54/M
Operating Instructions
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
Web Site: http://www.panasonic.co.jp/global/
ENGLISH
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read these
instructions completely. Please keep this manual for future reference.
Printed in Japan
QQTG0701
Se0503S0
ENGLISH
This manual was printed
with soy based ink.
QQTG0701
01_Caution for AC Mains Lead.fm 2 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後3時44分
Caution for AC Mains Lead
(For United Kingdom)
(For the type as shown in figures A
and B)
For your safety, please read the following text
carefully.
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three
pin mains plug for your safety and convenience.
A 5-ampere fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the
fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the
replacement fuse has a rating of 5-ampere and
that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark
or the BSI mark
on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you
must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is
replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must
not be used until a replacement cover is obtained.
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from
your local dealer.
WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT EITHER WIRE
TO THE EARTH TERMINAL WHICH IS MARKED
WITH THE LETTER E, BY THE EARTH
SYMBOL
OR COLOURED GREEN OR
GREEN/ YELLOW.
THIS PLUG IS NOT WATERPROOF
—KEEP DRY.
Before use
Remove the connector cover.
How to replace the fuse
The location of the fuse differ according to the type
of AC mains plug (figures A and B). Confirm the
AC mains plug fitted and follow the instructions
below. Illustrations may differ from actual AC
mains plug.
1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.
Figure A
Figure B
Fuse cover
CAUTION!
IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS
UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN
YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE
REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND
DISPOSED OF SAFELY. THERE IS A
DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK
IF THE CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO
ANY 13-AMPERE SOCKET.
If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the
wiring code as stated below. If in any doubt please
consult a qualified electrician.
IMPORTANT
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
Blue: Neutral, Brown: Live.
As these colours may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your
plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured Blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter N or coloured Black or Blue.
The wire which is coloured Brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter L or coloured Brown or Red.
2
QQTG0701
2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse
cover.
Figure A
Figure B
Fuse
(5 ampere)
Fuse
(5 ampere)
For United Kingdom and Republic of Ireland
www.panasonic.co.uk (for UK customers only)
• Order accessory and consumable items for your
•
•
•
•
product with ease and confidence by telephoning
our Customer Care Centre Mon–Friday
9:00am–5:30pm. (Excluding public holidays.)
Or go on line through our Internet Accessory
ordering application.
Most major credit and debit cards accepted.
All enquiries transactions and distribution facilities
are provided directly by Panasonic UK Ltd.
It couldn’t be simpler!
Customer Care Centre
For UK customers: 08705 357357 For Republic of
Ireland customers: 01 289 8333
Technical Support
For UK customers: 0870 1 505610
This Technical Support Hot Line number is for
Panasonic PC software related products only.
For Republic of Ireland, please use the Customer
Care Centre number listed above for all enquiries.
For all other product related enquiries, please
use the Customer Care Centre numbers listed
above.
01_Caution for AC Mains Lead.fm 3 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後3時44分
THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY
IN THE U.S.A. AND CANADA
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE SCREWS.
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user
to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of
sufficient magnitude to constitute a
risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an
equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of
important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the
appliance.
(for U.S.A. and Canada)
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK MATCH WIDE
BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC
SHOCK OR PRODUCT DAMAGE, DO NOT EXPOSE
THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE, DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS
FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL
BE PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.
THE FOLLOWING APPLIES
ONLY IN THE U.S.A.
CAUTION:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio
or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment
and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
FCC Warning:
To assure continued FCC emission limit compliance, use only the provided power supply cord and
the shielded interface cable when connecting this
device to the computer.
Also, any unauthorized changes or modifications to
this equipment would void the user’s authority to
operate this device.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Responsible Party:
Matshshita Electric Corporation of America
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ, 07094 USA
Telephone No.: 1-800-211-7262
THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY IN THE U.S.A.
Notice:
This product has a fluorescent lamp that contains a
small amount of mercury.
It also contains lead in some components. Disposal of
these materials may be regulated in your community
due to environmental considerations.
For disposal or recycling information please contact
your local authorities, or the Electronics Industries
Alliance: <http://www.eiae.org>
The model number and serial number are found
underneath the keyboard.
Please note the model and serial numbers in the
space provided below and retain this sheet as a
permanent record of your purchase to aid identification
in the event of theft.
MODEL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN TROPICAL CLIMATES.
DENNA ENHET ÄR AVSEDD FÖR ANVÄNDNING PÅ PLATSER MED TROPISKT KLIMAT.
TÄMÄ LAITE ON TARKOITETTU KÄYTETTÄVÄKSI TROOPPISESSA ILMASTOSSA.
DETTE APPARATET ER BEREGNET TIL BRUK UNDER TROPISKE KLIMAFORHOLD.
3
QQTG0701
01_Caution for AC Mains Lead.fm 4 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後3時44分
4
QQTG0701
01_Caution for AC Mains Lead.fm 5 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後3時44分
5
QQTG0701
01_Caution for AC Mains Lead.fm 6 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後3時44分
THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY IN THE U.S.A.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read these operating instructions carefully before using the unit. Follow the safety instructions on the unit and the
safety precautions listed below. Keep these operating instructions handy for future reference.
Safety
1. Power Source—Connect the unit to a power
source of the type described in these instructions or
as marked on the unit.
2. Polarization—The unit is equipped with a polarized
power plug where one blade is wider than the other.
This safety feature ensures that the plug fits into
your household AC outlet only one way. If the plug
doesn’t fit one way, try reversing it. If the plug still
doesn’t fit, contact an electrician to replace the
obsolete outlet. Do not attempt to defeat the safety
purpose of the plug.
3. Power Cord protection—Route the AC power supply cord so that it will not be walked on or pinched
by items placed on or against it. Never take hold of
the plug or cord with wet hands. Always grasp the
plug body firmly when connecting and disconnecting it.
4. Overloading—When connecting the AC power
supply cord, be careful not to overload the household AC outlet, extension cord, or outlet from any
other device as this can result in fire or electric
shock.
5. Nonuse periods—Turn the unit off when it is not in
use. Unplug the unit from the household AC outlet if
it is not to be used for a long time. Unplug the unit
during lightning storms.
6. Attachments and accessories—Use only the
attachments and accessories recommended in
these operating instructions.
Installation
Placement
1. Ventilation—Situate the unit so that it receives
proper ventilation. Do not install in a confined space
such as a bookcase or cabinet. Allow at least 10 cm
(4 inches) clearance from the rear of the unit. To
prevent the risk of electric shock or fire due to overheating ensure curtains and other materials do not
obstruct the unit’s ventilation.
2. Foreign material—Ensure objects and liquids do
not get into the unit. Avoid exposing the unit to
excessive smoke, dust, mechanical vibration, and
shock.
3. Magnetism—Situate the unit away from equipment
and devices that generate strong magnetic fields.
4. Stacking—Do not place heavy objects on top of
this unit.
5. Surface—Place the unit on a flat, level surface.
6
QQTG0701
6. Carts and stands—Use the unit only
with carts and stands recommended by
the manufacturer. Move carts with care.
Sudden stops, excessive force, and
uneven surfaces can cause carts to
overturn.
7. Wall and ceiling mounting—Do not mount the unit
on walls or ceilings unless specified in the instructions.
Environment
1. Water and moisture—Do not use the unit near
water, such as near a bathtub or swimming pool.
Avoid damp basements.
2. Heat—Situate the unit away from heat sources,
such as radiators.
Do not situate where temperatures fall below 5°C
(41°F) or rise above 35°C (95°F).
Maintenance
(See page 7 for details.)
Unplug the unit from the household AC outlet before
cleaning.
Clean with a damp cloth.
Do not use abrasive pads, scouring powders, or solvents.
Service
1. Damage Requiring Service—The unit should be
serviced by qualified service personnel if:
(a) The AC power supply cord or the plug has been
damaged; or
(b) Objects or liquids have gotten into the unit; or
(c) The unit has been exposed to rain; or
(d) The unit does not operate normally or exhibits a
marked change in performance; or
(e) The unit has been dropped or the cabinet damaged.
2. Servicing—Do not attempt to service the unit
beyond that described in these operating instructions. Refer all other servicing to authorized servicing personnel.
3. Replacement parts—When parts need replacing
ensure the servicer uses parts specified by the
manufacturer or parts that have the same characteristics as the original parts. Unauthorized substitutes may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
4. Safety check—After repairs or service, ask the servicer to perform safety checks to confirm that the
unit is in proper working condition.
01_Caution for AC Mains Lead.fm 7 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後3時44分
Cautions for safest use of this unit
Installation location
If operation seems abnormal
1. A well-ventilated place.
Immediately turn off the power, disconnect the power
cord plug from the electrical outlet, and contact the
store where it was purchased.
Take care not to use this unit in a place where it
will not receive sufficient ventilation, and not to
permit the ventilation holes to be covered by curtains, or any similar materials.
2. Place away from direct sunlight and excessive
heat from heating equipment.
3. A place where humidity, vibration and dust are
minimized.
Discontinue using the unit at once. Failure to do so
may result in additional damage or some other unexpected damage or accident.
• Because the power source is located inside the
unit, it is normal for the cabinet to become warm.
A word about the power cord
Power source
1. Be sure the line voltage selector is in accordance
with local voltage in your area before connecting
the plug to the socket.
2. DC power cannot be used.
Handling the power cord
1. Never touch the power cord, or its plug, with wet
hands.
If the power cord is scarred, is partially cut or
bronken, or has a bad contact, it may cause a fire or
serious electrical shock if used. NEVER use a damaged power cord for any appliance. Moreover, the
power cord should never be forcibly bent.
Don’t touch the inside parts of this
unit.
Some places inside this unit have high voltage potential. Never try to remove the top or back panels of this
unit, or to touch inside parts by hand or with tools.
2. Don’t pull the power cord.
Metal items inside the unit may
result in electric shock or damage.
Do not permit metal articles to get inside the unit.
Be especially careful with regard to this point if
children are near this unit. They should be warned
never to try to put anything inside.
If, nevertheless, some such article does get inside,
disconnect the power cord plug from the electrical
outlet, and contact the store where the unit was
purchased.
If water gets into the unit
Disconnect the power cord plug from the electrical
outlet, and contact the store where it was purchased.
As a precaution, it is suggested that flower vases and
other containers which hold liquids not be placed on
the top of this unit.
• This product may receive radio interference
caused by mobile telephones during use. If such
interference is apparent, please increase separation between the product and the mobile telephone.
Contact someone who is qualified in order to inspect
the inside, or to replace a fuse, if such becomes necessary. Never attempt to do these things yourself.
Maintenance
The following suggestions will assist you in keeping
the unit in top condition.
• Be sure to switch the instrument off after use, and
do not switch the unit on and off in quick
succession, as this places an undue load on the
electronic components.
• To keep the luster of the surface and buttons, simply use a clean, damp cloth; polish with a soft, dry
cloth. Polish may be used but do not use thinners
or petro-chemical-based polishes.
• A wax-based polish may be used on the cabinet,
although you will find that rubbing with a soft cloth
will suffice.
SVENSK: Det kan inträffa att den här produkten
under användningen tar emot radiostörningar,
orsakade av mobiltelefoner. Öka avståndet mellan
produkten och mobiltelefonen om störningarna är
uppenbara.
SERVICE MUST BE CARRIED OUT BY DEALER
OR OTHER QUALIFIED PERSON
7
QQTG0701
02_Contents.fm 8 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後3時48分
Contents
Cautions for safest use of this unit ............................................................................................................. 7
Controls and functions............................................................................................................................... 10
BASIC FUNCTIONS
Getting started ................................................................................................................................ 12
Playing the piano ............................................................................................................................ 13
Progressive Pianist ......................................................................................................................... 14
See and listen to the demonstration ............................................................................................... 15
Select a sound ................................................................................................................................ 16
Select the registration for a music style (PIANO STYLIST) ............................................................ 17
Automatic panel settings (ONE TOUCH PLAY) .............................................................................. 18
Record your performance (SEQUENCER)..................................................................................... 20
Store your panel settings (PANEL MEMORY) ................................................................................ 22
Save data on a floppy disk .............................................................................................................. 23
Load rhythm data from a Technics pattern disk (COMPOSER LOAD) ........................................... 25
Play back commercial song disks (DIRECT PLAY) ........................................................................ 26
PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS
About the display ............................................................................................................................ 27
Favorites ......................................................................................................................................... 30
Part I Sounds and effects ......................................................................................................................... 31
Overview of sounds ........................................................................................................................ 31
Selecting sounds ............................................................................................................................ 31
Assigning parts to the keyboard ..................................................................................................... 34
Pedals ............................................................................................................................................. 35
Touch Sensitivity ............................................................................................................................. 36
Effects ............................................................................................................................................. 37
Transpose ....................................................................................................................................... 39
Techni-chord ................................................................................................................................... 40
Part II Playing the rhythm......................................................................................................................... 41
Overview of rhythm performance.................................................................................................... 41
Selecting rhythms ........................................................................................................................... 41
Playing the rhythm .......................................................................................................................... 43
Auto Play Chord.............................................................................................................................. 44
Fade In/Fade Out ............................................................................................................................ 48
Sound Arranger .............................................................................................................................. 49
One Touch Play .............................................................................................................................. 49
Piano Stylist .................................................................................................................................... 50
Music Style Arranger ...................................................................................................................... 51
Panel Memory................................................................................................................................. 52
Part III Sequencer ...................................................................................................................................... 54
Outline of the Sequencer................................................................................................................ 54
Sequencer parts ............................................................................................................................. 57
Easy Record ................................................................................................................................... 58
Realtime Record ............................................................................................................................. 59
Sequencer Play .............................................................................................................................. 61
Naming ........................................................................................................................................... 63
Panel Write ..................................................................................................................................... 63
Song Select .................................................................................................................................... 64
Punch Record ................................................................................................................................. 64
Step Record.................................................................................................................................... 65
Track Assign ................................................................................................................................... 70
Quantize ......................................................................................................................................... 71
Song Clear...................................................................................................................................... 72
Track Clear...................................................................................................................................... 72
Note Edit ......................................................................................................................................... 73
Drum Edit........................................................................................................................................ 74
Copy and paste the recorded data ................................................................................................. 75
Changing the note position etc. of the recorded data ..................................................................... 78
Part IV Composer ...................................................................................................................................... 80
Outline of the Composer................................................................................................................. 80
Simple recording method................................................................................................................ 81
Create a completely new rhythm .................................................................................................... 82
Chord Modify Change..................................................................................................................... 84
Part Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 84
Playback ......................................................................................................................................... 85
Step Record.................................................................................................................................... 86
Measure Edit................................................................................................................................... 87
Pattern Copy ................................................................................................................................... 88
8
QQTG0701
02_Contents.fm 9 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後3時48分
Part V Disk Drive ....................................................................................................................................... 90
Outline of the Disk Drive function ................................................................................................... 90
Outline of the procedure ................................................................................................................. 92
Loading data ................................................................................................................................... 93
Direct Play ...................................................................................................................................... 95
Song Medley................................................................................................................................... 96
Saving data..................................................................................................................................... 97
Disk management........................................................................................................................... 99
Set the automatic display when a disk is inserted ........................................................................ 100
Part VI Sound........................................................................................................................................... 101
Outline of the Sound ..................................................................................................................... 101
Part Setting ................................................................................................................................... 102
Mixer ............................................................................................................................................. 104
Master Tuning ............................................................................................................................... 106
Key Scaling ................................................................................................................................... 106
Sound Load Option....................................................................................................................... 107
APC Reverb Setting...................................................................................................................... 107
Part VII Reverb & Effect .......................................................................................................................... 108
Outline of the Reverb & Effect ...................................................................................................... 108
Tone Control ................................................................................................................................. 108
Part VIII Sound Edit................................................................................................................................. 109
Outline of the Sound Edit.............................................................................................................. 109
Easy Edit....................................................................................................................................... 110
Tone Edit....................................................................................................................................... 110
Pitch Edit....................................................................................................................................... 113
Filter Edit....................................................................................................................................... 114
Amplitude Edit............................................................................................................................... 116
LFO Edit........................................................................................................................................ 117
Effect Edit ..................................................................................................................................... 118
Controller Edit ............................................................................................................................... 118
Store the new sound..................................................................................................................... 119
Part IX Control ......................................................................................................................................... 120
Outline of Control functions .......................................................................................................... 120
Pedal Setting ................................................................................................................................ 120
Part X Customize..................................................................................................................................... 122
Outline of Customize functions ..................................................................................................... 122
Display Time Out .......................................................................................................................... 123
Data Protection ............................................................................................................................. 124
MIDI Setting Load Option ............................................................................................................. 124
Part XI MIDI .............................................................................................................................................. 125
What is MIDI? ............................................................................................................................... 125
Outline of MIDI functions .............................................................................................................. 126
Part Setting ................................................................................................................................... 127
Control Messages......................................................................................................................... 128
Realtime Messages ...................................................................................................................... 128
Common Setting ........................................................................................................................... 129
Mode Setting................................................................................................................................. 130
Input/output Setting....................................................................................................................... 130
MIDI Presets ................................................................................................................................. 131
Computer Connection................................................................................................................... 132
Initialize ...................................................................................................................................................... 133
Connections .............................................................................................................................................. 134
Assembly ................................................................................................................................................... 135
Symptoms which appear to be signs of trouble .................................................................................... 136
Error messages ......................................................................................................................................... 138
Index........................................................................................................................................................... 140
Specifications............................................................................................................................................ 141
䡲 Supplied accessories
Please check the supplied accessories.
□ Music stand
□ AC cord
□ CD-ROM
9
QQTG0701
03_Controls and functions.fm 10 ページ
2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後3時50分
Controls and functions
PIANO STYLIST
You can choose to have
all the settings of this
instrument automatically
set. (Refer to page 50.)
AUTO PLAY CHORD
Add an automatic
accompaniment to your
selected rhythm.
(Refer to page 44.)
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
OFF/ON
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
Various rhythm patterns are
available for each rhythm
group.
(Refer to page 41.)
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
VARIATION
3
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
M
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
PROGRESSIVE PIANIST
Your piano offers a fun method
of learning to play piano.
(Refer to page 14.)
FADE IN/OUT
Begin your song with a slowly
increasing volume, or end it by
having the sound slowly fade away.
(Refer to page 48.)
TRANSPOSE
Raise or lower the key
of the entire keyboard.
(Refer to page 39.)
Tuning
Unlike an acoustic piano, your PR Series Digital Ensemble never needs tuning.
The pitch of this instrument can be adjusted for when playing along with other instruments.
(Refer to page 106.)
10
QQTG0701
03_Controls and functions.fm 11 ページ
2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後3時50分
FAVORITES
Fashion a customized display
in which all your favorite
sounds, rhythms and styles etc. are
assembled. (Refer to page 30.)
DISPLAY
Displays performance information,
function settings and other messages.
(Refer to page 27.)
Use the CONTRAST buttons to
adjust the display so that it is easy to
read.
SOUND GROUP
Various sounds are
available for each
sound group.
(Refer to page 31.)
SEQUENCER
Record and play
back your
performance.
(Refer to page 54.)
SOUND GROUP
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
SAX &
ORGAN &
GUITAR &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
PLAY
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
A
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
PANEL MEMORY
PIANO
CONDUCTOR
Assign a different sound to
each part, then assign the
desired parts to sections of
the keyboard.
(Refer to page 34.)
PANEL MEMORY
Store the panel settings,
then recall them
instantaneously just by
pressing a button or two.
(Refer to page 52.)
EFFECT
Add various effects
to the sounds.
(Refer to page 37.)
TECHNI-CHORD
Block chords are
automatically added to the
melody.
(Refer to page 40.)
11
QQTG0701
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 12 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時32分
Getting started
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
OFF/ON
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
3
2
VARIATION
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
PANEL MEMORY
PIANO
4
1
Plug the power cord into an outlet.
2
Press the POWER button to turn it on.
4
Set the MAIN VOLUME to an
appropriate level with the sliding control.
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
POWER
OFF ON
MIN
(Right end of the keyboard)
• The power indicator in the left front of the body is
lit.
3
Touch any note on the keyboard.
• Your piano features Touch Response. You
control the volume by playing the keys harder or
softer.
Keyboard cover
Open and close the cover slowly.
12
QQTG0701
Music Stand
Insert the music stand in the two holes as
shown in the diagram.
Playing the piano
Your piano is equipped with various fine functions which make it an extremely versatile instrument. But it
should be remembered that it is first of all a fine piano. Select one of the piano sounds and enjoy its
excellent quality.
When you activate the SIMPLE PIANO feature, the entire keyboard is instantly transformed into a piano,
regardless of the current instrument settings.
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
OFF/ON
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
VARIATION
3
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
PANEL MEMORY
PIANO
2
1
GRAND
B
1
Press the SIMPLE PIANO button to turn
it on.
SIMPLE PIANO
• The indicator lights.
• The display changes to the SIMPLE PIANO
display.
2
Select the desired type of piano sound.
• The sounds and effects are automatically set.
• “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display, and
then the normal display reappears.
3
Play anywhere on the keyboard.
• This procedure will cancel the current settings for sounds
and effects, etc. Therefore, if you wish to later recall the
current settings, be sure to store them in the PANEL
MEMORY (page 52) or save them to a disk (page 97)
before beginning this procedure.
13
QQTG0701
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 13 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時32分
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 14 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時32分
Progressive Pianist
Your piano offers a fun method of learning to play piano. Start one of the 100 etudes incorporated in this
piano, read the music in the display, listen to the gentle accompaniment for your own and, have a good
practice!
AUTO PLAY CHORD
SPLIT
POINT
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SOUND
SAX &
ORGAN &
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
VARIATION
3
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
Press the PROGRESSIVE PIANIST
button.
Select the goal of the practice.
3
Use the SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
a preferred song.
4
Press the LISTEN button.
5
Press the START/STOP button on the
control panel and listen to the model
interpretation while watching the music
on the display.
• Press the START/STOP button to stop the
model performance. Press it again to continue
the interpretation from the point at which it was
interrupted.
14
QQTG0701
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PANEL MEMORY
2-8
6
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
2
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
PIANO
1·9
1
GRAND
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
When you have finished listening, press
the appropriate button to access the next
step.
• In the Practice Makes Perfect/Musical Discovery
mode, press the PLAY (STEP2) button, and for
the Grand Performer/Pianist Mode Session
mode, follow the step number to continue your
practice.
7
Press the RESET button.
8
Press the START/STOP button to start
the exercise. Play the keyboard and
follow the music exactly.
• The MEASURE returns to the beginning of the
song.
• To redo your exercise from the beginning, press
the START/STOP button to stop the music and
press the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL IN 1)
button. You can also use the MEAS button to
start from a desired position.
• If the tempo of the accompaniment is too fast,
press the SLOW 1 button in the ONE TOUCH
TEMPO section. If it is still too fast, press the
SLOW 2 button. (You can also use the
TEMPO/PROGRAM dial to adjust the tempo.)
• The music pages shown on the display turn
automatically. If you wish to turn them manually,
set TURN PAGE to MANUAL and you can press
the PAGE button to change the display (upper;
previous page, lower; next page). In this case,
you can also turn the page by depressing the left
pedal.
• To play a different song while the performance is
stopped, press the EXIT button, and then repeat
the above procedure from step 2.
9
To exit this feature, press the
PROGRESSIVE PIANIST button again.
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 15 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時32分
See and listen to the
demonstration
AUTO PLAY CHORD
SPLIT
POINT
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
MODE
OFF/ON
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
VARIATION
3
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
PIANO
1·3
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
1
GRAND
B
PANEL MEMORY
2
Press the DEMO button.
DEMO
2
Use the buttons to the left and right the
display to select the demonstration tune
you wish to see and listen to.
• The demonstration performance and display
corresponding to your selection will begin.
• To end the demonstration before it has finished,
press the START/STOP button.
3
When you are finished listening to the
demonstration tunes, press the DEMO
button again.
• If you press and hold the DEMO button for a few seconds,
or if you press first the DEMO button and then the
START/STOP button, all the internal demo tunes are
demonstrated in order in a medley performance. The
medley performance continues until the START/STOP
button or the DEMO button is pressed again.
• Some of the buttons do not function during the DEMO
mode.
15
QQTG0701
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 16 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時32分
Select a sound
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
OFF/ON
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PLAY
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
RIGHT 2
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
3
4
1
VARIATION
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
In the CONDUCTOR section on the
panel, press the RIGHT 1 button to turn
it on.
2
RIGHT 2
SOUND GROUP
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
PIANO
3
Select a sound from the list of sounds
shown on the display.
• For most of the buttons, the list of sounds is
contained on two or more screen “pages.” To
see a different part of the list, press either PAGE
button.
4
16
QQTG0701
SET
Play the keyboard.
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
A
Add reverberation.
A
Press the REVERB button to turn it on.
RIGHT 1
In the SOUND GROUP or PIANO
section, press one of the sound buttons.
STRINGS VOCAL
P.MEM 5-8
C
1
REVERB
2
B
PANEL MEMORY
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
BANK
PIANO
3
1
GRAND
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 17 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時32分
Select the registration for a
music style (PIANO STYLIST)
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
OFF/ON
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
3
4
VARIATION
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
P.MEM 5-8
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PANEL MEMORY
2-6
Press the PIANO STYLIST button to
turn it on.
5
Press the PIANO STYLES button.
Use the ARRANGE MODE button to
select the desired type of arrangement.
Use the GENRE/ERA/ALPHABET
button to select a group. Use the STYLE
button to select a style.
• In the above example, GENRE was selected.
• If the list covers more than one screen “page,”
the MORE button is shown on the display. Use
the MORE button to switch between screen
pages.
• The AUTO PLAY CHORD and SYNCHRO &
BREAK turn on, and the sounds, effects,
rhythm, tempo, volume balance, etc. which are
best suited for the selected music style are
automatically selected.
PIANO STYLIST
3
SIMPLE PIANO
PIANO
1·7
2
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
C
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
1
GRAND
B
6
Play the keyboard.
7
When you are finished selecting the
style, turn the PIANO STYLIST button
off.
• When you specify a chord on the left area of the
keyboard, the automatic accompaniment
immediately begins to play.
• You can use the TEMPO/PROGRAM dial to
adjust the tempo.
• Select the type you wish to play (PIANO
SOLO/PIANO & COMBO/PIANO &
ENSEMBLE).
4
Use the SELECT MODE button to
specify how you wish to select a style.
GENRE: Select a style by musical genre.
ERA: Select a style by era.
ALPHABET: Select a style from an alphabetical
list.
17
QQTG0701
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 18 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時32分
Automatic panel settings
(ONE TOUCH PLAY)
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
OFF/ON
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
IN
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
3
2
4
VARIATION
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
1
5 1
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
P.MEM 5-8
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PANEL MEMORY
2
4
FUNK &
SOUL
BALLROOM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD & SHOW
USA
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
Use your left hand to play the chords
and your right hand to play the melody.
• Pressing a key on the left area of the keyboard
will cause the automatic rhythm pattern to start
playing (synchro start).
RHYTHM GROUP
ROCK
SIMPLE PIANO
PIANO
In the RHYTHM GROUP section, press
the button for a desired rhythm.
METRONOME POP
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
C
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
3
GRAND
B
5
At the end of your performance, press
the INTRO & ENDING 1 or 2 button.
LOAD
• Do not select the METRONOME or the
MEMORY button.
2
Select a rhythm from the list of rhythms
on the display.
3
Press and hold the ONE TOUCH PLAY
button for a few seconds.
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
• The sound, effects and tempo suitable for the
selected rhythm are automatically selected.
The tempo can be adjusted with the
TEMPO/PROGRAM dial.
18
QQTG0701
INTRO & ENDING
• An ending pattern is played, after which the
automatic accompaniment stops.
• If the START/STOP button is pressed, the
accompaniment stops immediately.
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 19 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時32分
C
F
G7
C
C
F
G7
C
C
G7
F
• In this example you played chords by pressing the keys for
the “root notes” (ONE FINGER chords). But you can also
specify the chord by playing all the notes in the chord.
(Refer to page 45.)
• You can insert a fill-in pattern while the preset rhythm
pattern is playing by pressing either the FILL IN 1 or FILL
IN 2 button.
19
QQTG0701
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 20 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時32分
Record your performance
(SEQUENCER)
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
OFF/ON
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
USA
CONDUCTOR
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
VARIATION
3
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
PIANO
2
PANEL MEMORY
1
Sonatina
Right hand
Left hand
1
In the SEQUENCER section, press the
EASY REC button to turn it on.
2
Press the OK button.
SEQUENCER
PLAY
EASY
REC
• The display changes to the REALTIME
RECORD display.
20
QQTG0701
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 21 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時32分
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
OFF/ON
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
USA
CONDUCTOR
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
VARIATION
3
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
A
4 BEAT
START / STOP
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
Play the song on the keyboard.
When you have finished playing, press
the EASY REC button again to turn it off.
P.MEM 5-8
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PANEL MEMORY
PIANO
A
4
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
C
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
3
GRAND
B
4
Playing back your recorded
performance
A
Press the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL
IN 1) button.
1
2
FILL IN
SEQUENCER
PLAY
EASY
REC
• The PLAY button in the SEQUENCER section
turns on.
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
B
Press the START/STOP button.
1
2
3
4 BEAT
START / STOP
• Your performance is played back just as you
recorded it.
• When you are finished playing back your
performance, press the PLAY button in the
SEQUENCER section to turn it off.
21
QQTG0701
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 22 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時32分
Store your panel settings
(PANEL MEMORY)
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
OFF/ON
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
VARIATION
3
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
PANEL MEMORY
PIANO
2 3
1
Set up the desired panel settings
(sounds, volumes, etc.)
2
Use the BANK button to select a bank
(A, B, C).
3
With the SET button held down, press
one of the numbered buttons of the
PANEL MEMORY (1 to 8).
P.MEM 5-8
SET
A
B
BANK
• Lighting up both the A and B indicators enables
C to be selected.
• The bank names are shown on the display.
BANK
22
QQTG0701
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
C
PANEL MEMORY
• Turning the P.MEM 5-8 button ON enables the
selection of panel settings for numbers 5 to 8.
• The current panel settings are now stored in the
specified bank and number. When you select
the same bank and number again, the stored
panel settings are recalled.
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 23 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時32分
Save data on a floppy disk
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
OFF/ON
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
VARIATION
3
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
2-5
1
Insert a disk you wish to save to into the
Disk Drive slot. Push it all the way in until
you hear a click.
4
Specify a file number to save to.
MUTE
2
On the DISK MENU display, select
SAVE.
5
• If you attempt to use the SAVE procedure when
an unformatted disk is inserted into the Disk
Drive slot, the FORMAT display appears. Follow
the instructions on the display to format the disk.
(Formatting the disk will clear any data which is
currently stored on the disk.)
3
Press the SAVE button.
• The performance data of the song recorded in
the SEQUENCER is saved on the floppy disk.
Select TECHNICS FORMAT.
23
QQTG0701
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 24 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時32分
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
OFF/ON
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PLAY
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
CONDUCTOR
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
LEFT
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
RIGHT 2
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
3
4
VARIATION
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
Recall data from a floppy disk
Press and hold the DISK button for a few
seconds.
DISK
DISK
IN USE
2/6
3/7
2·3
4 1
3
Press the LOAD button.
4
Press the PLAY button in the
SEQUENCER section to turn it on.
• The data is copied to the internal memory of this
instrument.
SEQUENCER
LOAD
EASY
REC
PLAY
CHORD STEP REC
2
Select the file you wish to load.
5
Press the START/STOP button.
1
2
3
4 BEAT
START / STOP
• The recalled song is played back.
MUTE
■ The following data can be saved/loaded:
PERFORMANCE
BACKUP
CURRENT PANEL (The current panel settings)
PANEL MEMORY
SEQUENCER
COMPOSER (MEMORY contents)
SOUND MEMORY
EFFECT MEMORY
MIDI (USER memory of the MIDI PRESETS) & FAVORITES
• For detailed infomation, refer to page 90.
24
QQTG0701
4/8
PANEL MEMORY
PIANO
5
1/5
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
1
GRAND
B
Load rhythm data from a Technics
pattern disk (COMPOSER LOAD)
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
OFF/ON
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
3
4
VARIATION
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
3·4
2
1
Insert a commercially sold Technics
pattern disk into the Disk Drive slot.
2
In the RHYTHM GROUP section, press
and hold the LOAD (MEMORY) button
for a few seconds.
4
Press the LOAD button.
RHYTHM GROUP
METRONOME POP
ROCK
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
FUNK &
SOUL
USA
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
• Rhythm data is loaded to the COMPOSER
memory (MEMORY). You can use the rhythms
during your performance, just like the preset
rhythms.
LOAD
3
Select the name of the pattern to load.
MUTE
25
QQTG0701
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 25 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時32分
Basic functions
04_Basic functions.fm 26 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時32分
Play back commercial song disks
(DIRECT PLAY)
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
MODE
OFF/ON
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
VARIATION
3
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
BANK
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
2-4
1
Insert the song disk into the Disk Drive
slot.
3
Use a the buttons below the display to
select a song.
MUTE
2
On the DISK MENU display, select
DIRECT PLAY.
• For SMF songs, use the PLAY AS button to
specify a sound arrangement mode.
4
• DIRECT PLAY is possible from the following
disks:
Standard MIDI File
Standard MIDI File with Lyrics
DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION™ (DOC)
PianoDisc™
* All product and company names are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective owners.
* DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION is a trademark of
the YAMAHA Corporation.
26
QQTG0701
Press the START button.
• The selected song is played back.
05_About the display.fm
27 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時39分
About the display
A large-size display, easy to operate with excellent readability, is used for displaying various information
such as the names of the selected sounds and rhythms etc. and when setting the functions. Let’s take a
look.
• The display illustrations shown in this User’s Manual are examples for the sake of clarification; the actual displays on your in strument may differ from the illustrations.
About the display
Normal display (HOME PAGE)
This is the kind of information you see on the display during a normal performance.
Selected rhythm
RIGHT 1 part sound
Tempo
RIGHT 2 part sound
LEFT part sound
Volume of each part
Volume balance
At the bottom half of the normal display, the volume balance of each part is represented in a
fader illustration and by a number (0 to 127). You
can use the balance buttons below the display to
adjust the volumes.
OTHER PARTS/TR
MUTE
APC: AUTO PLAY CHORD
METR: METRONOME
When setting the volume balance, press the
upper button to increase the volume and the
lower button to decrease it.
• Hold a button down to scroll the volume quickly.
<Auto accompaniment part>
Pressing the OTHER PARTS/TR button will display the auto accompaniment part setting
screen.
• DRM: DRUMS ACP: ACCOMP
䡲 MUTE
To mute a part, press both the corresponding
upper and lower buttons at the same time.
RT: RIGHT
• Pressing either balance button for a muted part will cancel the mute function.
䡲 OTHER PARTS/TR
By the pressing the OTHER PARTS/TR button,
the screen sequentially switches to the respective volume balance screens of the play part,
auto accompaniment part, playback part (1 to 8),
and playback part (9 to 16). The playback part
(PT) is used to playback recording and song
data.
• The volume display for a muted part is shown as “MUTE.”
27
QQTG0701
About the display
05_About the display.fm
28 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時39分
PAGE
Setting display
When there are additional parts to the current
display, a page number indication, for example
PAGE1/2, appears in the upper right corner of
the screen. For example, 1/2 indicates that there
are two pages of the display, and the current
page is page 1. In this case, you can use the
upper and lower PAGE buttons, to the right of
the balance buttons, to view different “pages” of
the display.
When you select an item from the menu display,
the setting display for the item is shown.
The buttons to the right, left and/or directly below
the display are used to select and adjust the settings.
䡲 Example of setting display: MASTER
TUNING
PAGE
• Press the upper button to view the next page of the display, and the lower button to view the previous page of
the display.
• On the last page of the display, pressing the upper button
returns to the first page. And conversely, on the first page
of the display, pressing the lower button will skip to the
last page.
MUTE
Press the button corresponding to the ∧ or ∨ button on the display to change the value.
• In this manual, this procedure is written as follows: “Use
the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the pitch.”
Menu display
The PROGRAM MENUS button controls multiple
functions. Press the button to access its menu
display.
PROGRAM
MENUS
TEMPO/PROGRAM
If the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit while
you are using the display to adjust the setting, it
indicates that this dial can be used to quickly
change the displayed value or setting.
TEMPO / PROGRAM
䡲 Example of menu display: PROGRAM
MENUS
Select a function from the menu display by
pressing the corresponding button to the left or
right of the display indicated by the 䊴 and 䊳
arrows.
• The setting which can be adjusted is highlighted on the
display.
EXIT
While the setting display is shown, press this button to go back to the previous display.
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
• In this manual, the steps describing how to select a function from a menu display are generally abbreviated as follows, for example: “On the PROGRAM MENUS display,
select SOUND.”
28
QQTG0701
05_About the display.fm
29 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時39分
DISPLAY HOLD
• The following display appears.
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
2. Use the buttons below the display to select a
language.
3. Press the OK button.
• The indicator for this button may flash if the current display is one which is normally automatically canceled.
• If the PROGRAM MENUS button, for example, is
pressed, the DISPLAY HOLD mode is canceled.
CONTRAST
4. Press a button on the panel whose explanation you wish to read.
• An explanation of the button’s function is shown on the
display.
5. Press the HELP button again to exit the help
Press the CONTRAST button and adjust the display's viewability using the ∧ and ∨ buttons on
the screen.
CONTRAST
mode.
• Attention display messages and error messages are also
shown in the selected language.
• The appearance of the display on your instrument may
be different from the illustrated display in this manual
depending on the region in which your instrument was
purchased and the selected display language.
• When adjusting the CONTRAST, the set value is shown
shortly on the display.
HELP
You can find an explanation of each button’s
function on the display.
1. Press the HELP button.
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
29
QQTG0701
About the display
Press this button to turn it on when you wish to
maintain the current display. You can keep a display which is normally automatically canceled,
for example, or even during a performance, you
can monitor information which is not shown on
the normal display.
05_About the display.fm
30 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時39分
Favorites
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
SAX &
ORGAN &
GUITAR &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
3
VARIATION
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
About the display
SIMPLE PIANO
B
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
With up to 9 types of sounds, rhythms, functions, etc., you can arrange them to make up your own unique
screen pattern.
1. Press the FAVORITES button to turn it on.
4. While pressing the SET button, specify where
you wish to paste (put) the item.
FAVORITES
• While the SET button is depressed, the display appears
as shown below. Use the buttons to the left and right of
the display to specify where you wish to paste the item.
• The display looks similar to the following.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create the display you
want.
• There are nine settable items on the display.
2. Press the FAVORITES SETTING button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
6. On the FAVORITES SETTINGS display,
press the OK button.
• Your customized display is stored.
3. Select the desired item.
• Use the CATEGORY ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a category, and then the ITEM ∧ and ∨ buttons to select an
item.
• The MUTE KEYS function silences the sound of the keyboard keys. This is convenient when you wish to pretend
to play the keyboard while playing back a recorded performance.
• The PANIC function interrupts the sound, for example,
when it fails to cease during a MIDI performance.
䡲 Recall a FAVORITES display
1. Press the FAVORITES button to turn it on.
2. Use the buttons to the left and right of the display to specify the ITEM you wish to recall.
• The FAVORITES settings can be saved to a disk.
30
QQTG0701
06_Part I.fm 31 ページ
2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時24分
Part I Sounds and effects
Overview of sounds
The following is an overview of the sound parts of this instrument.
NX SOUND
Part
NX SOUND is the Technics original sound generator format which evokes realtime performance quality and expressive power, and
dramatically expands the number of sounds
and effects generated. This format includes
GM2 (General MIDI Level 2), and make various
controls possible when data is created and
reproduced by computer.
This instrument is organized into the following
parts.
• These are independent from the playback parts. For
example one can to perform on the keyboard while
playing back a song disk with 16-part standard MIDI
files (SMF).
• For information about GM2, refer to page 91.
PART1 to 16:
SMF song disk playback parts, or parts for
MIDI receive.
• Equipment with the logo shown below is compatible
with NX SOUND song data.
ACCOMP1 to 5, BASS, DRUMS 1, 2:
Parts for the automatic accompaniment.
METRONOME:
METRONOME part.
Selecting sounds
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
VARIATION
3
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
Select the sounds for the three parts you can play on the keyboard—RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT. After
first selecting a part and a SOUND GROUP, choose the desired sound from the display.
Select a sound
1. In the CONDUCTOR section, choose RIGHT
1, RIGHT 2 or LEFT.
2. In the SOUND GROUP section, select a
sound group.
SOUND GROUP
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
• The CONDUCTOR buttons are used to specify which
part is heard. (Refer to page 34.)
STRINGS VOCAL
SAX &
ORGAN &
GUITAR &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
PIANO
(Continued on the next page)
31
QQTG0701
Sounds and effects
RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT:
These are the parts the performer plays on
the keyboard.
06_Part I.fm 32 ページ
2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時24分
Part I
Sounds and effects
• The sounds in DRUM KITS are percussion sounds that
you play by striking the keyboard keys.
• MEMORY is reserved for storing sounds you modify.
(Refer to page 119.)
䡲 ALPHABET
Press the CTG button to show the sound names
in alphabetical order.
• Press the ALP button to return to the CATEGORY display.
3. Select the desired sound from the list on the
display.
Digital Drawbar
You can play organ sounds while controlling the
drawbars on the display.
1. In the CONDUCTOR section, select a part.
2. Press the DIGITAL DRAWBAR button to turn
Sounds and effects
it on.
• When you select a sound, the optimum effects for the
sound are automatically applied.
You can also choose to cancel this automatic feature.
(Refer to page 107.)
• If there is more than one page to the display, use the
PAGE buttons to move from one screen page to another.
• Use the OCTAVE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the octave.
• To exit the sound select display, press the EXIT button.
• The sound you select is memorized for the part you
selected in step 1.
• The sounds that can be selected for the RIGHT 1, RIGHT
2 and LEFT parts and for PART 1-16 vary.
• The illustrated display shows one example, and the
actual display may be different.
DIGITAL
DRAWBARS
• The display looks similar to the following.
4. Play the keyboard.
3. Use the balance buttons below the display to
SOUND EXPLORER
This is a convenient feature for finding the sound
you want from the many available sounds.
1. In the CONDUCTOR section, choose RIGHT
1, RIGHT 2 or LEFT.
2. Press the SOUND EXPLORER button to turn
it on..
adjust the volume of each drawbar.
• The volume of each drawbar is illustrated on the display
and changes when you press the corresponding balance
buttons to adjust the volume.
• The DIGITAL DRAWBAR can not be selected for the
ACCOMP and BASS parts of the COMPOSER or
SOUND ARRANGER.
<DRAWBAR SETTING>
Press the DRAWBAR SETTING button.
SOUND
EXPLORER
䡲 Change the sound type
Use the <Jazz Drawbars> / <Rock Drawbars>
button to select the type of sound.
3. Use the GRP ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a
GROUP of sound.
4. Use the buttons on both side of the display to
select the sound.
• The numerical value that is displayed for each sound is
the MIDI [BANK MSB, LSB]-PROGRAM CHANGE number.
• GM2 sounds are selected on this display.
32
QQTG0701
䡲 PERCUSSIVE TONE
PERCUSSIVE TONE adds a tone with a fast initial attack to the drawbar sounds. You can select
two pitch levels of attack tones.
Use the PERCUSSIVE TONE 2 2/3’ and 4’ buttons to turn the respective tone on or off.
06_Part I.fm 33 ページ
2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時24分
Part I
Sounds and effects
䡲 TREMOLO
Tremolo is a rapid oscillation in volume, like the
effect of a rotating speaker. The tremolo speed
can be changed while you are playing.
ATTACK TIME:
Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the time it
takes for the drawbar sound to sound after
a key is played.
RELEASE TIME:
Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the time it
takes for the drawbar sound to die out after
the keys are released.
DECAY:
Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the time it
takes for the percussive tone to die out.
LEVEL:
Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the volume of the percussive tone.
Use the TREMOLO button to switch between the
SLOW and FAST rotating speeds.
• The tremolo setting is effective for each part in common.
• The TREMOLO is disabled if the MULTI EFFECT button
is turned ON.
䡲 Other settings
Use the buttons on either side of the display to
select a setting item, and use one of the ∧ and ∨
buttons, whichever is relevant for the selection,
and set.
Sounds and effects
• The above settings are effective for the RIGHT 1, RIGHT
2 and LEFT parts in common.
About foot marks
The foot indication (for example 8’) refers to the pitch of a rank of pipes in a pipe organ. If 8’ is used as
the standard (the pitch as played on the keyboard), a 16’ rank pitch will be one octave below the 8’ rank
pitch, and a 4’ rank pitch one octave above.
When the C key is pressed, the sounds of the different pitch ranks are as follows.
16'
8'
5 1/3 '
4'
2 2/3 '
2' 1 3/5 ' 1 1/3 '
1'
33
QQTG0701
06_Part I.fm 34 ページ
2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時24分
Part I
Sounds and effects
Assigning parts to
the keyboard
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
SAX &
ORGAN &
GUITAR &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
VARIATION
3
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
The CONDUCTOR buttons are used to assign the parts (RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT) to the keyboard in
many different ways. For example, you can split the keyboard into right and left sections (SPLIT), and
assign a different sound to each section.
CONDUCTOR
CONDUCTOR settings
How sounds are assigned to the keyboard
All keys produce the RIGHT 1 sound.
CONDUCTOR
Sounds and effects
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
RIGHT 1
All keys produce the RIGHT 2 sound.
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
RIGHT 2
All keys produce both the RIGHT 1 sound and the RIGHT 2 sound.
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
RIGHT 1 + RIGHT 2
The left keys produce the LEFT sound and the right keys produce the
RIGHT 1 sound and the RIGHT 2 sound.
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
LEFT
The left keys produce the LEFT sound and the right keys produce the
RIGHT 1 sound.
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
LEFT
RIGHT 2
RIGHT 1
LEFT
• The volume for each part can be adjusted independently. (Refer to page 27.)
• The following conditions are in effect when the AUTO PLAY CHORD is used.
—BASIC, ADVANCED mode: You cannot assign sounds to all the keys.
—PIANIST mode: The keyboard cannot be split.
34
QQTG0701
RIGHT 1
The left keys produce the LEFT sound and the right keys produce the
RIGHT 2 sound.
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 1 + RIGHT 2
RIGHT 2
06_Part I.fm 35 ページ
2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時24分
Part I
Sounds and effects
SPLIT POINT
You can split the keyboard into right and left sections (SPLIT), and assign a different sound to
each section.
䡲 Customized split point
Use the following procedure if you wish to store a
split point at a location other than G2/C3/C4.
1. Press the LEFT button in the CONDUCTOR
1. Press and hold the SPLIT POINT button for a
to turn it on.
few seconds.
• If the LEFT part does not turn on, then turn off the AUTO
PLAY CHORD, or select any mode except PIANIST.
SPLIT
POINT
2. Use the SPLIT POINT button to define the
SPLIT
POINT
G2 C3
• The following display appears.
C4
2. Press a key on the keyboard to specify the
• Each time the SPLIT POINT button is pressed, the indication moves to the next split point in the following order.
G2 → C3 → C4 → customized split point (all indicators
off) (see below).
desired split point.
• A split point is set at the location of the pressed key, and
is indicated on the keyboard illustration on the display.
• The key at the split point is the lowest note of the right
keyboard section.
• After a few seconds, the display exits the setting mode.
• Whenever the keyboard is split, you can select your customized split point by pressing the SPLIT POINT button
until none of the split point indicators is lit. In this case,
the customized split point is indicated on the display.
Pedals
䡲 Sustain pedal
When a key is released while this pedal is
depressed, the sound is sustained so that it lingers and slowly fades out.
Sustain pedal
Soft pedal
• This effect does not work for the sounds in the DRUM
KITS group.
• This effect does not work for some sounds.
• The length of the sustain can be set for each part. (Refer
to page 102.)
䡲 Soft pedal
When this pedal is depressed, the sound is
softer and the volume is slightly lower.
• You can select a different function to control with this
pedal. (Refer to page 120.)
String resonance
String resonance is the sound heard in an acoustic piano when the struck strings produce a sympathetic resonance of the other unstruck strings.
For the GRAND PIANO and UPRIGHT PIANO
sounds, string resonance is produced as long as
the sustain pedal is depressed. The amount of
string resonance can be adjusted.
1. Press and hold the GRAND button for a few
seconds.
GRAND
• STRING RESONANCE DEPTH is shown on the display.
(Continued on the next page)
35
QQTG0701
Sounds and effects
point that divides the left and right keyboard
sections.
06_Part I.fm 36 ページ
2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時24分
Part I
Sounds and effects
2. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the amount
• The higher the number, the greater the amount of resonance.
• When set to 0, there is no string resonance.
of resonance (0 to 99).
Touch Sensitivity
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
SAX &
ORGAN &
GUITAR &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
3
2
VARIATION
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
Sounds and effects
MUTE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
Adjust keyboard touch response.
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
PROGRAM
MENUS
MINIMUM RANGE: Specify whether or not the keyboard
keys function when the keys are pressed very softly
(ON/OFF).
• When set to ON, the keys do not function when they are
pressed very softy, as in an acoustic piano. When set to
OFF, the keys function even when they are pressed very
softly.
4. When you have finished adjusting the settings,
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Select TOUCH SENSITIVITY.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select the function you wish to set. Use the ▲
and ▼ buttons to adjust the setting.
TOUCH SENSITIVITY: This is the keyboard touch response
setting.
• Select from HEAVY 3, HEAVY 2, HEAVY 1, NORMAL
and LIGHT.
36
QQTG0701
press the PROGRAM MENUS button again.
06_Part I.fm 37 ページ
2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時24分
Part I
Sounds and effects
Effects
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
GUITAR &
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
3
2
VARIATION
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
3. Use the buttons to the right of the display to
select the type.
DIGITAL EFFECT gives the sound richness and
enhances your performance.
• If the types comprise more than one display “page,” use
the PAGE buttons to switch pages.
1. In the CONDUCTOR or PART SELECT sec-
• Press the VARI button to enable the variation effect.
tion, turn on the part to which this effect will be
applied.
2. Press the DIGITAL EFFECT button to turn it
on.
DIGITAL
EFFECT
• This display can also be accessed from the REVERB &
EFFECT MENU display. (Refer to page 108.)
䡲 EFFECT EDIT
The effects can be edited and then stored in a
memory.
1. Select an effect type to use as a base.
• The on or off status of the DIGITAL EFFECT is preset for
each sound.
• This effect does not work for the sounds in the DRUM
KITS sound groups.
• This effect may not work for some sounds.
2. Press the EFFECT EDIT button.
• The display changes to the following.
MULTI EFFECT
The MULTI EFFECT works like a studio effects
processor, providing effects such as CHORUS,
PHASER, DELAY and DISTORTION.
3. Use the PARAMETER ▲ and ▼ buttons to
select the parameter.
1. In the CONDUCTOR or PART SELECT section, turn on the part to which this effect will be
applied.
2. Press the MULTI EFFECT button to turn it on.
MULTI
EFFECT
4. Use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the
setting.
• The parameters vary depending on the effect type
selected as the base.
• (V) is the abbreviation of VARIATION.
5. Press the WRITE button.
䡲 Type and parameter settings
1. Press and hold the MULTI EFFECT button for
a few seconds.
• The display changes to the following.
6. Press the EFFECT NAMING button and
assign a name to the effect, if necessary.
• Refer to page 52 for details about the NAMING procedure.
7. Use the EFFECT MEMORY ▲ and ▼ buttons
2. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select an effect
group.
• The EFFECT MEMORY is for edited effects (see below).
to specify the location in which to store the
edited effect.
8. Press the OK button.
37
QQTG0701
Sounds and effects
DIGITAL EFFECT
06_Part I.fm 38 ページ
2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時24分
Part I
Sounds and effects
REVERB
• The display looks similar to the following.
REVERB applies a reverberation effect to the
sound.
Press the REVERB button to turn it on.
REVERB
2. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the name
of the effect group.
䡲 Type and parameter settings
1. Press and hold the REVERB button for a few
seconds.
Sounds and effects
• The display changes to the following.
• EFFECT MEMORY is an edited effect group.
3. Use the buttons to the right of the display to
select a type.
䡲 EFFECT EDIT
Your edited effect can be stored in a memory for
later recall.
• The procedure is the same as for MULTI EFFECT. (Refer
to page 37.)
2. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select an effect
group.
• The EFFECT MEMORY is an edited effect group.
3. Use the buttons to the right of the display to
BRILLIANCE
The brightness of the sound can be set for each
performance part.
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
select a type.
• If the types comprise more than one display “page,” use
the PAGE buttons to switch pages.
PROGRAM
MENUS
4. Use the TOTAL DEPTH ∧ and ∨ buttons to
set the depth of the effect.
• This display can also be accessed from the REVERB &
EFFECT MENU display. (Refer to page 108.)
• The display will appear as follows:
䡲 EFFECT EDIT
Your edited effect can be stored in a memory for
later recall.
• The procedure is the same as for MULTI EFFECT. (Refer
to page 37.)
2. Select BRILLIANCE.
CHORUS
Add breadth to the sound.
Press the CHORUS button to turn it on.
CHORUS
䡲 Type and parameter settings
1. Press and hold the CHORUS button for a few
seconds.
3. Use the PART ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a
part.
4. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select the level of brightness.
• For some sounds, the brightness does not change.
38
QQTG0701
06_Part I.fm 39 ページ
2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時24分
Part I
Sounds and effects
3. Select MIC REVERB & EFFECT.
MIC REVERB & EFFECT
• The display looks similar to the following.
You can add reverb and other effects to sound
from a connected microphone.
• Connect a microphone to this instrument. (Refer to page
134.)
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
4. Set using the button on the left of the display.
PROGRAM
MENUS
Select the effect name (MIC REVERB/MIC
EFFECT).
• Use the PARAMETER ▲ and ▼ buttons to select an
attribute, and use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust
the corresponding setting.
• You can specify whether or not to apply the reverb with
the MIC REV ON/OFF button.
6. Set the MIC EFFECT.
• Use the PARAMETER ▲ and ▼ buttons to select an
attribute, and use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust
the corresponding setting.
• You can specify whether or not to apply the effect with
the MIC EFF ON/OFF button.
2. Select REVERB & EFFECT.
Transpose
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
SAX &
ORGAN &
GUITAR &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
3
VARIATION
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
The TRANSPOSE buttons are used to change the key of the entire instrument in semi-tone steps across
an entire octave.
Suppose you learn to play a song—in the key of C, for example—and decide you want to sing it, only to
find that it’s either too high or too low for your voice. Your choice is to either learn the song all over again
in a different key, or to use the TRANSPOSE feature.
<Example: transposed to D>
- TRANSPOSE +
Adjust the key with the + and – buttons.
• The key is changed in half-tone increments up to plus or
minus one octave.
• If the two buttons are pressed at the same time, the key
returns to C.
• When the TRANSPOSE function is active, the transposed key is shown on the HOME PAGE display.
Played keys
C major
Notes that sound
D major
39
QQTG0701
Sounds and effects
5. Set the MIC REVERB.
• The display will appear as follows:
06_Part I.fm 40 ページ
2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時24分
Part I
Sounds and effects
Techni-chord
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
GUITAR &
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
3
VARIATION
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
PANEL MEMORY
PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD turns your single note melodies into full chords and offers you a choice of different types
from a simple duet which adds one harmony note to your melody note, to big band reeds which adds four
harmony notes to your melody note. If TECHNI-CHORD is part of a ONE TOUCH PLAY or PIANO
STYLIST registration, a suitable TECHNI-CHORD type will be selected automatically.
Example:
Left hand (chord)
C
D
G7
C
Sounds and effects
Right hand (melody)
1. Split the keyboard into left and right sections.
Type setting
2. Press the TECHNI-CHORD button to turn it
1. Press and hold the TECHNI-CHORD button
on.
for a few seconds.
• The display looks similar to the following.
TECHNI-CHORD
3. Play the keyboard.
• The melody you play with your right hand is automatically
played in chords which are based on the chords you play
with your left hand.
• This feature is very effective when used with the AUTO
PLAY CHORD.
2. Use the 䊴, ▲, ▼,
䊳 buttons to select the har-
mony style.
• When the OCTAVE, HARD ROCK or FANFARE style is
selected, the TECHNI-CHORD functions even when the
keyboard is not split.
䡲 ORCHESTRATOR
You can specify which part is used for the harmony tones. Your TECHNI-CHORD performance is enhanced by selecting harmony
sounds different from the sounds you play and
the sounds produced by the automatic accompaniment.
1. Use the ORCHESTRATOR ∧ and ∨ buttons
to select the part for the harmony notes.
• If CONDUCTOR is selected, the harmony notes are produced in the sounds of the part which is currently
selected in the CONDUCTOR (RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2). In
other words, the harmony notes are produced in the
same sound as the melody notes. If both RIGHT 1 and
RIGHT 2 are on, the harmony notes are produced in the
sound of the RIGHT 1 part.
• In the case of EASY RECORD (see page 58), when set
to a PART other than PART 4, the TECHNI-CHORD
sound is not recorded; so when you use EASY
RECORD, please set to CONDUCTOR or PART 4.
40
QQTG0701
07_Part II.fm 41 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時16分
Part II Playing the rhythm
Overview of rhythm performance
An explanation follows of the terms related to this instrument’s rhythm performance.
Rhythm and accompaniment
pattern
Rhythm and Style
One rhythm of this instrument is comprised of
four VARIATION patterns, and for each one the
optimum sounds and effects are set.
All of these together comprise one STYLE.
Each rhythm is comprised of not only a DRUMS
pattern, but also of accompaniment patterns
called BASS and ACCOMP. The combination
of all of these is the rhythm.
• The accompaniment pattern sounds when you perform
using the AUTO PLAY CHORD (APC). (Refer to page
44.).
RHYTHM
VARIATION 1
PANEL setting
VARIATION 2
PANEL setting
VARIATION 3
PANEL setting
VARIATION 4
PANEL setting
• In the PIANO STYLIST (page 50) and MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER (page 51) etc. this STYLE is summoned.
Selecting rhythms
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
3
2
VARIATION
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
Many exciting rhythms are stored in the memory of this instrument. First select one of the rhythm groups
and then choose the desired rhythm.
Select a rhythm
1. In the RHYTHM GROUP section, select a
rhythm group.
2. Select the desired rhythm from the list on the
display.
RHYTHM GROUP
METRONOME POP
ROCK
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
FUNK &
SOUL
USA
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
LOAD
• If there is more than one page to the display, use the
PAGE buttons to move from one screen page to another.
• MEMORY is the group in which you store the rhythms
you create with the COMPOSER. (Refer to page 85.)
41
QQTG0701
Playing the rhythm
STYLE
07_Part II.fm 42 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時16分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
䡲 VARIATION
There are four variations available for each
rhythm. Use the VARIATION buttons to select
the desired variation.
䡲 Synchronized start
With the synchronized start feature, the rhythm
pattern starts when you play a key on the keyboard.
1. Select a rhythm.
1
2
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
3
4
VARIATION
2. Press the SYNCHRO & BREAK button to turn
it on.
SYNCHRO & BREAK
• Confirm that the MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER button is
off. (If it is on, press it once to turn it off.)
• The nuance of the pattern differs with each variation
number.
• You can change to a different variation while the rhythm
is playing.
METRONOME
1. In the RHYTHM GROUP section, select MET-
point.
• The rhythm pattern begins to play.
• You can use the synchronized start feature even when
the keyboard is not divided into left and right sections. To
start the rhythm, press a key to the left of the specified
split point.
䡲 Adjust the tempo
The tempo of the rhythm pattern is adjusted with
the TEMPO/PROGRAM dial.
RONOME.
• The following display appears.
Playing the rhythm
3. Play a key to the left of the keyboard split
TEMPO / PROGRAM
2. Select the time signature for the metronome.
• Select “Metronome Off” if you do not wish the first beat of
the measure to be accented.
• Press the START/STOP button to start the metronome.
Start the rhythm
There are two ways to start the rhythm.
䡲 Normal start
• The tempo is shown on the display as a numerical value
( q = 40 to 300).
• When the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit, the
TEMPO/PROGRAM cannot be used to adjust the tempo.
• To adjust the tempo during playback, refer to page 61.
䡲 TAP TEMPO
You can set the tempo of the rhythm by tapping
this button few times with your finger at the
tempo you wish to play.
1. Select a rhythm.
TAP TEMPO
2. Press the START/STOP button to turn it on.
1
2
3
4 BEAT
START / STOP
• The selected rhythm pattern immediately begins to play.
• You can stop the rhythm by pressing the START/STOP
button again to turn it off.
• The BEAT indicators above the START/STOP button
light to indicate the beat.
42
QQTG0701
• The tempo at which the button is tapped is detected, and
the tempo automatically changes correspondingly.
07_Part II.fm 43 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時16分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
Playing the rhythm
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
GUITAR &
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
3
VARIATION
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
Intro, fill-in and ending patterns fitting each different rhythm pattern are permanently recorded in your PR,
thus allowing a versatile rhythm performance.
INTRO
Begin the rhythm performance with an intro pattern.
1. Press the INTRO & ENDING 1 or INTRO &
䡲 Mode setting
You can select the mode for the count sound.
1. Press the MODE button in the AUTO PLAY
CHORD section to turn it on.
ENDING 2 button to turn it on.
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MODE
1
OFF/ON
2
INTRO & ENDING
CHORD FINDER
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Press the START/STOP button to start the
1
2
3
4 BEAT
START / STOP
2. Use the COUNT INTRO button to select a
• An intro pattern is played, after which the normal rhythm
pattern begins.
mode.
VOICE: A spoken count (initialized setting).
CLICK: A clicking sound for the count.
COUNT INTRO
You can begin the rhythm performance with a
spoken one-measure count.
FILL IN
1. Press the COUNT INTRO (FILL IN 2) button
You can insert a fill-in pattern any time during the
rhythm performance. Choose from two different
fill-in patterns.
to turn it on.
2
FILL IN
COUNT
INTRO
1. Select a rhythm and press the START/STOP
button.
2. Press the FILL IN 1 or FILL IN 2 button.
1
2. Press the START/STOP button to start the
2
FILL IN
rhythm.
• A spoken one-measure count is played, after which the
normal rhythm pattern begins.
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
• A fill-in pattern is heard immediately for the remainder of
the measure.
• When a FILL IN button is pressed on the last beat of the
measure, the fill-in pattern continues to the end of the following measure.
43
QQTG0701
Playing the rhythm
rhythm.
07_Part II.fm 44 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時16分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
2. Press the INTRO & ENDING 1 or INTRO &
ENDING
ENDING 2 button to turn it on.
Finish the rhythm performance with an ending
pattern.
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1. Select a rhythm and press the START/STOP
button.
• An ending pattern is produced, and then the rhythm performance stops.
• If you accidentally press the INTRO & ENDING button in
the middle of the tune, you can press the FILL IN 1 or
FILL IN 2 button. The ending pattern stops, and a fill-in
pattern is produced, after which the normal rhythm performance continues.
Auto Play Chord
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
3
2
VARIATION
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
Playing the rhythm
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
Simply by playing a chord on the keyboard, the AUTO PLAY CHORD function automatically plays an
accompaniment pattern which matches perfectly the selected rhythm. With a real accompaniment as a
background, you can concentrate on playing the melody.
How the AUTO PLAY CHORD works
Playing chords
Choose from the 4 ways of playing chords.
Chord
Melody
When an AUTO PLAY CHORD mode is
selected, an automatic accompaniment which
matches the rhythm you have chosen is played
in the chord which you specify with your left
hand. The melody is played with your right hand.
• The accompaniment pattern of the AUTO PLAY CHORD
is composed of 8 parts: DRUMS 1, 2, BASS, ACCOMP
1–5.
• The volume of each part can be adjusted with the buttons
below the display. (Refer to page 27.)
44
QQTG0701
䡲 BASIC mode
This mode lets beginners specify chords with just
one finger. With this mode, chords can be specified either with one finger <one finger> or by
pressing all of the chord's sound components
<fingered>.
<one finger>
In the <one-finger>, a major chord can be played
just by pressing the key for its root note.
Example: C chord
07_Part II.fm 45 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時16分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
Minor, seventh and minor seventh chords are also easily produced.
•
minor chord
seventh chord
minor seventh chord
Play the root note plus a
black key to the left of it.
Play the root note plus a
white key to the left of it.
Play the root note plus a
black key and a white key to
the left of it.
Example: Cm
Example: C7
Example: Cm7
When three or more keys of a chord are pressed, it is recognized as a <fingered> chord.
• Play at least three notes to specify the chord.
• If the CHORD FINDER procedure is used, you can see the
types of chords that can be specified and the keys you
press to play them. (Refer to page 47.)
䡲 ADVANCED 1 mode
How to use the AUTO PLAY CHORD
This mode accepts chords specified with <fingered> and disregards all unrecognizable chord
specifications.
1. Select the desired rhythm and sound(s), and
• It recognizes many more chords than the BASIC mode’s
<fingered> chords.
2. Press the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s OFF/ON
set the tempo.
button to turn it on.
䡲 ADVANCED 2 mode
AUTO PLAY CHORD
This mode accepts chords specified with <fingered> and, for unrecognizable chords, it plays
the auto accompaniment according to the keys
pressed.
• It recognizes many more chords than the BASIC mode’s
<fingered> chords.
䡲 PIANIST mode
In the PIANIST mode, the entire keyboard can
be used to specify chords <fingered>
(ADVANCE) for the automatic accompaniment; a
RIGHT part is assigned to all the keys, and the
keyboard does not split.
MODE
OFF/ON
CHORD FINDER
3. Press the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s MODE button to turn it on.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• When specifying chords, if you press a key a perfect 5th or
more below the lowest note of the chord, the BASS part
becomes a pattern based on that note.
<APC HOLD>
If this function is assigned to the left pedal, for
example, pressing the left pedal will play the currently specified chord in that timing, allowing you
to focus your performance on a solo melody.
4. Select an AUTO PLAY CHORD mode .
• The accompaniment continues in the same chord as long
as the PEDAL is depressed, and it does not change even if
other chords are played.
• To change the PEDAL assignment, refer to page 120.
5. Press the START/STOP button to begin the
• After a few seconds, the display returns to the previous
display.
• If the BASIC or ADVANCED mode was selected, the keyboard automatically splits into right and left sections.
rhythm.
• You can start the rhythm by playing a key on the keyboard. (Refer to page 42.)
(Continued on the next page)
45
QQTG0701
Playing the rhythm
<fingered>
In the <fingered>, you specify the chord by playing all the notes in the chord.
07_Part II.fm 46 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時16分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
䡲 MEMORY
Press the MEMORY button and select either one
of the following:
ON:
Even when removing your finger from
the keys, the present chord is retained
until the next chord is specified.
OFF: When removing your finger, the chord
is deleted.
AUTO: The chord is retained when auto
accompaniment is playing but is not
retained when stopped.
6. Specify a chord.
• If the BASIC or ADVANCED mode was selected, specify
the chord on the keyboard section to the left of the split
point.
• An accompaniment pattern in the specified chord is automatically played. Play the melody with your right hand.
• When you use FILL IN, INTRO and ENDING, the automatic accompaniment is also used in these patterns.
• You can set the mode which determines how the LEFT
part sounds during an AUTO PLAY CHORD performance. (See below.)
• In the initialized condition, when the rhythm is off, if an
AUTO PLAY CHORD mode is on and a chord is specified, the specified root note (R. BASS part) and chord
notes (CHORD part) are produced. The volumes of these
notes can be adjusted. (Refer to page 27.)
䡲 ON BASS
If the ON BASS button is ON, the BASS part is
produced in the key of the lowest note of the
played chord, thus making it possible to play
chords such as C on G.
7. To stop the automatic accompaniment, press
the START/STOP button.
• If you wish the automatic accompaniment to begin and
end the performance, set the OFF/ON button to off.
• For example, with the ON BASS button on, if you play a
C chord by pressing the keys G, C and E, the BASS part
is produced in the key of G.
Example of how to play a BASIC <One-Finger> accompaniment
Playing the rhythm
Play the melody with
your right hand.
C
F
G
C
Left hand
Left Hold
This setting determines how the LEFT part
sounds when the LEFT button in the CONDUCTOR is on during a performance with the BASIC
or ADVANCED mode.
1. Press the MODE button to turn it on.
• The display changes to the following.
ON:
Specifying <one-finger> chords in the BASIC
mode produces the full chords; otherwise the
LEFT part notes are those of the pressed
chord keys.
• When BASIC is selected the LEFT part turns off, but it
will sound if you turn it on.
• Touch response does not function for the LEFT part.
• When the mode is set to ON, during a rhythm performance, the LEFT part continues to play even when the
keys are released.
APC VOLUME
2. Use the LEFT HOLD: ON/OFF button to set
the mode to on or off.
OFF:
The LEFT part sounds from the pressed chord
keys.
• When BASIC is selected, the LEFT part turns off. The
LEFT part sounds if you turn it on, but <one-finger>
chords cannot be specified.
To adjust the volume balance between the automatic accompaniment and the parts you play
manually on the keyboard, the volume of all the
automatic accompaniment parts can be lowered
as one.
⇒ Use the APC/SEQUENCER VOLUME slide
control to adjust the volume.
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
MAX
OFF
46
QQTG0701
07_Part II.fm 47 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時16分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
• Use this control to lower the automatic accompaniment
volume when it is too loud relative to your manual performance.
• At the MAX position, the volumes of the automatic
accompaniment parts correspond to their current settings; at the OFF position, the volume is 0. The volume
should normally be set to MAX.
• The set values are shown in the APC column of the volume balance display. (Refer to page 27.)
• The volume can be adjusted for each part. (Refer to page
27.)
• When the position of the slide control coincides with the
actual volume, the indicator is lit. When the volume is
changed by of the PANEL MEMORY or SEQUENCER
playback, the actual volume differs from that indicated by
the position of the slide control. In this case, the indicator
is not lit.
• During SEQUENCER playback or disk DIRECT PLAY,
operation of this slide control affects the total volume of
all the playback parts.
4. Use the ROOT buttons to select the root note
of the chord. Use the TYPE buttons to select
the type of chord.
• A typical way to finger the specified chord (TYPICAL) is
illustrated on a keyboard diagram.
• Each time the INVERSION button is pressed, different
INVERSION fingerings are illustrated in order. (If there is
no INVERSION fingering for the specified chord, this button is not shown on the display.)
• When the button with a picture of an ear is pressed, the
notes of the chord sound. (The octave of the illustrated
keys and that of the played tones may differ.)
5. To exit the CHORD FINDER procedure, press
the EXIT button.
BREAK function
With the break function, the rhythm starts when
the left keyboard is played and stops when the
fingers are removed from the keys.
The CHORD FINDER can help, for example,
when you do not know which keys to press to
specify a given chord. When you input the chord
name, the CHORD FINDER shows you which
keys to press and even lets you hear the notes
that make up.
1. Select an AUTO PLAY CHORD mode.
• At this time, the MEMORY (APC SELECT) button should
be OFF.
2. Press the SYNCHRO & BREAK button to turn
it on.
Playing the rhythm
CHORD FINDER
1. Press the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s MODE button to turn it on.
SYNCHRO & BREAK
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MODE
OFF/ON
3. Specify a chord.
CHORD FINDER
• The automatic accompaniment begins to play (synchronized start).
• For the PIANIST mode, play the keys to the left of the
currently set split point.
• The display changes to the following.
4. Release the chord keys.
• The automatic accompaniment stops. When the keys are
pressed again, the rhythm starts from the first beat.
2. Select CHORD FINDER.
• The display changes to the following.
3. Use the APC MODE button to select the automatic accompaniment mode you will use to
specify chords (BASIC, ADVANCED 1).
• In the list column are shown the chords which can be
specified in each mode.
47
QQTG0701
07_Part II.fm 48 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時16分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
Fade In/Fade Out
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
SAX &
ORGAN &
GUITAR &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
3
2
VARIATION
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
Add interest to your performance by starting a part with a fade-in or ending it with a fade-out.
FADE IN
FADE SET
At the beginning of the song, the volume of each
part rises slowly.
Adjust the settings for the FADE IN and FADE
OUT.
1. Set up the panel settings for your perform-
1. Press and hold the FADE IN or FADE OUT
ance.
button for a few seconds.
2. Turn on the FADE IN button.
FADE
FADE
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
Playing the rhythm
• The display looks similar to the following.
• The indicator flashes. In this condition, the volumes for all
parts change to 0 and no sound is produced from this
instrument until the FADE IN is turned off or until step 3 is
executed.
3. Play the keyboard or press the START/STOP
button.
• The volume slowly builds to its preset level.
• For the fade-in effect for a rhythm part or when playing
back a SEQUENCER performance, turn on the FADE IN
button before pressing the START/STOP button.
• At the end of the fade-in, the FADE IN indicator goes out.
• During the fade-in, FADE IN is shown in the upper right
part of the normal display.
FADE OUT
At the end of the song, the volume of each part
gradually fades to nothing.
1. Start the performance.
2. Turn on the FADE OUT button at the point you
want the fade-out to start.
FADE
IN
OUT
• The volumes of all the parts slowly fade to 0.
• The indicator flashes to show that fade-out is completed,
and then goes out. The volumes for all parts return to
their specified settings.
• If you wish to interrupt the fade-out, press the FADE OUT
button to turn it off.
48
QQTG0701
2. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the item.
Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the setting.
FADE IN
Time:
Specify the time elapsed between 0 volume
to the set volume (1 measure to 16 measure).
FADE OUT
Time:
Specify the time elapsed between the set
volume and 0 volume (1 measure to 16
measure).
Auto Reset:
Specify whether the volume of each part
automatically returns to its specified setting
(ON, OFF).
Rhythm Auto stop:
Specify whether the rhythm turns off after
fade-out is completed (ON, OFF).
SEQ Auto stop:
Specify whether the SEQUENCER playback automatically stops after fade-out is
completed (ON, OFF).
• The display returns to the previous display a few seconds
after you have changed the settings.
• You can also access this display from the CONTROL
MENU display. (Refer to page 120.)
07_Part II.fm 49 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時16分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
Sound Arranger
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
IN
METRONOME POP
FUNK &
SOUL
ROCK
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
SAX &
ORGAN &
GUITAR &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
3
2
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
4
1
VARIATION
2
2
1
FILL IN
1
INTRO & ENDING
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
A
4 BEAT
START / STOP
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
B
BANK
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
PANEL MEMORY
PIANO
The SOUND ARRANGER feature lets you select other sounds for the AUTO PLAY CHORD parts of
each rhythm.
1. Select the rhythm whose sound you wish to
• For the DRUMS part, select sounds from the DRUM
KITS group.
• The sound and on/off status of the DIGITAL EFFECT are
shown on the display.
• The sounds marked with # cannot be changed.
change.
• Do not select the METRONOME or the MEMORY button.
2. Press and hold the SOUND ARRANGER button for a few seconds.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the other parts as
desired.
SOUND
ARRANGER
• Pressing the ORIGINAL button will reset the sounds to
their original settings.
SET
6. When you have finished selecting the sounds,
press the EXIT button.
• This display can also be accessed from the SOUND
MENU display. (Refer to page 101.)
• The display looks similar to the following.
1. Press the SOUND ARRANGER button to turn
it on.
2. Start the rhythm (automatic accompaniment).
3. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the part
• When the SOUND ARRANGER button is off, the factorypreset sounds are produced.
whose sound you wish to change.
4. Select the desired sound.
• This setting can be set separately for each rhythm.
• The DIGITAL EFFECT on/off status can also be specified (except for DRUMS part).
DIGITAL
EFFECT
One Touch Play
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
VARIATION
3
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
ONE TOUCH PLAY automatically sets a suggested combination of sounds and an appropriate tempo for
your chosen rhythm style.
1. Select a rhythm pattern.
• Do not select the METRONOME or the MEMORY button.
2. Press and hold the ONE TOUCH PLAY button
for a few seconds.
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
• During setting, the style name is shown on the display.
• The AUTO PLAY CHORD and the SYNCHRO & BREAK
are automatically turned on, and the sounds and effects,
volume balances, tempo etc. that are ideal for your
selected rhythm are automatically set.
3. Play the keyboard.
• When you specify a chord, the automatic
rhythm begins to play immediately.
49
QQTG0701
Playing the rhythm
Playing back the sounds
07_Part II.fm 50 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午前8時12分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
Piano Stylist
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
VARIATION
3
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
This feature automatically launches the appropriate instrument settings when you select the style of the
arrangement you wish to play in. By using this feature, you can easily achieve a performance like that of a
first-rate pianist.
PIANO STYLES
Select a suitable style for your performance
based principally on the piano sound.
1. Press the PIANO STYLIST button to turn it on.
6. Play the keyboard.
• When you specify a chord on the left area of the keyboard, the automatic accompaniment begins to play.
• You can use the TEMPO/PROGRAM dial to adjust the
tempo.
7. When you are finished selecting the style, turn
PIANO STYLIST
• The display looks similar to the following.
the PIANO STYLIST button off.
ENSEMBLE STYLES
Playing the rhythm
Select a style suitable for an ensemble performance that uses the many sounds and rhythms
incorporated in this instrument.
1. On the PIANO STYLIST display, press the
ENSEMBLE STYLES button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Press the PIANO STYLES button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the GROUP button the select a style
group.
3. Use the ARRANGE MODE button to select
the desired type of arrangement.
• Select the type you wish to play (PIANO SOLO/PIANO &
COMBO/PIANO & ENSEMBLE).
4. Use the SELECT MODE button to specify how
you wish to select a style.
GENRE: Select a style by musical genre.
ERA: Select a style by era.
ALPHABET: Select a style from an alphabetical list.
5. Use the GENRE/ERA/ALPHABET button
below the display to select a group. Use the
STYLE button to select a style.
• In the above example, GENRE was selected.
• If the list covers more than one screen “page,” the MORE
button is shown on the display. Use the MORE button to
switch between screen pages.
• The AUTO PLAY CHORD and SYNCHRO & BREAK
turn on, and the sounds, effects, rhythm, tempo, volume
balance, etc. which are best suited for the selected music
style are automatically selected.
50
QQTG0701
• These are the same as the groups for the RHYTHM
GROUP button.
3. Use the RHYTHM button to select a rhythm,
and the STYLE button to select a style.
• The AUTO PLAY CHORD and SYNCHRO & BREAK
turn on, and the sounds, effects, rhythm, tempo, volume
balance etc. which are best suited for the selected music
style are automatically selected.
4. Play the keyboard.
• When you specify a chord on the left area of the keyboard, the automatic accompaniment immediately begins
to play.
• You can use the TEMPO/PROGRAM dial to adjust the
tempo.
5. When you are finished selecting the style, turn
the PIANO STYLIST button off.
07_Part II.fm 51 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時16分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
Music Style Arranger
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
SAX &
ORGAN &
GUITAR &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
VARIATION
3
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
The MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER helps you to make professional registration changes during your performance. Select between four contrasting registrations at the push of a button, or let your instrument
change the registration automatically for you when you use FILL IN 1 or 2. The MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER will also alter the accompaniment in character with the registration change creating a polished sounding arrangement.
How to use the MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER
1. Select a rhythm pattern.
• Do not select the METRONOME or the MEMORY button.
2. Press the MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER button
to turn it on.
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
• Each time the FILL IN 1 button is pressed, the FILL IN 1
pattern plays, and then the music style changes in the 4
➝ 3 ➝ 2 ➝ 1 order. And each time the FILL IN 2 button is
pressed, the FILL IN 2 pattern plays, and then the style
changes in the 1 ➝ 2 ➝ 3 ➝ 4 order.
䡲 MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER mode
You can define which panel settings change by
pressing a FILL IN button when the MUSIC
STYLE ARRANGER is used.
1. Press and hold the MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER button for a few seconds.
• The display changes to the following.
Playing the rhythm
3. Use the VARIATION buttons to select a style
(1 to 4).
1
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
3
4
VARIATION
2. Select the mode.
• The nuance of the pattern differs with each number.
• The panel settings (including the tempo) change according to the selected rhythm and music style. The AUTO
PLAY CHORD, the MEMORY and the SYNCHRO &
BREAK button are automatically turned on. When a key
on the left section of the keyboard is pressed, the automatic rhythm begins to play immediately.
• During your performance, the style can be changed, but
the tempo does not change.
How to change the music style
during your performance
While you are playing the keyboard with the
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER on, press the FILL
IN 1 or FILL IN 2 button.
1
RHYTHM:
Only the rhythm changes.
SOUND & RHYTHM:
The sound, effects, rhythms, etc. change.
PANEL MEMORY:
The PANEL MEMORY number (BANK A: 1 to
4) changes. You can store your desired panel
settings in the PANEL MEMORY beforehand
and switch from one to another quickly.
• After a few seconds, the display exits the setting mode.
• You can also access this setting display from the CONTROL MENU display. (Refer to page 120.)
2
FILL IN
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
51
QQTG0701
07_Part II.fm 52 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時16分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
Panel Memory
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
SAX &
ORGAN &
GUITAR &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
3
2
VARIATION
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
PANEL MEMORY stores all the current panel settings so you can recall them at the push of a button.
How to store the panel settings
By storing all the panel settings you use for a
song in the same bank, for example, you can
switch from one panel setup to the next in a
flash.
1. Set up the desired panel settings (sounds, volumes, etc.)
2. Use the BANK button to select a bank (A, B,
C).
A
B
Playing the rhythm
BANK
the numbered buttons
MEMORY (1 to 8).
BANK
You can assign names to the banks and memories.
1. Select one of the numbered buttons marked
PANEL MEMORY and hold it down for several seconds.
SET
3. With the SET button held down, press one of
B
Assign a name to the bank/memory
C
• Lighting up both the A and B indicators enables C to be
selected.
A
• You can use the bank names on PAGE 1/2 to select the
bank.
of
the
PANEL
2. Press the BANK NAMING button to assign a
name to the bank, or the MEMORY NAMING
button for the memory.
• The display looks similar to the following.
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PANEL MEMORY
3. Use the buttons below the display to assign a
name.
• Turning the P.MEM 5-8 button ON enables the selection
of panel settings for numbers 5 to 8.
• The panel settings are now stored in the specified bank
and number.
䡲 BANK VIEW
Select one of the numbered buttons marked
PANEL MEMORY and hold it down for several
seconds to check the 8 memory names of the
selected bank.
• Set the character input position with the POSITION buttons, select the characters with the alphanumeric buttons
and repeat name assignment.
• Switch from upper to lower case letters with the ABC, abc
button.
• Use the !#$ button to switch to the symbols character set.
• Press the INS button to enter a space at the cursor position.
• Press the DEL button to erase the character at the cursor
position.
• Press the CLR button to erase the entire name.
• Press the →← button to center the name.
4. When you have finished assigning the name,
press the OK button.
• You can use the BANK
banks.
52
QQTG0701
∧ and ∨ buttons to view other
07_Part II.fm 53 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時16分
Part II
Playing the rhythm
Recall the panel setup
2. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the item.
1. Use the BANK button to select a bank (A, B,
3. Use the ON and OFF buttons to store the on
C).
or off status for the selected item.
2. Press the desired PANEL MEMORY number
button (1 to 8).
• Turning the P.MEM 5-8 button ON enables the selection
of panel settings for numbers 5 to 8.
• The panel setup changes to the one stored in the specified memory.
• You can then change the sound settings, etc. manually;
however, the contents of the memory remain unchanged
until you store them again.
• The currently selected bank, memory number and memory name are shown in the top line on the normal display.
PANEL MEMORY mode
You can define which panel settings are recalled
when the PANEL MEMORY is used.
1. Press and hold the SET button for a few seconds.
Playing the rhythm
• The display changes to the following.
2. Select the mode.
NORMAL:
The sounds and volume balance, and CONDUCTOR status are stored.
EXPAND:
All the instrument’s settings are stored, including the rhythm (except for SOUND ARRANGER
on/off status), TRANSPOSE, tempo, etc.
• After a few seconds, the display exits the setting mode.
䡲 EXPAND MODE FILTER
You can specify which data is stored in the
EXPAND mode.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to access the PAGE
2/3–3/3 EXPAND MODE FILTER display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
53
QQTG0701
08_Part III.fm 54 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III Sequencer
Outline of the Sequencer
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
SAX &
ORGAN &
GUITAR &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
VARIATION
3
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
A sequencer records your performance in a similar way to a tape recorder. This instrument’s
SEQUENCER allows you to record up to 10 performances in a variety of ways. You may want to record
your entire performance in one go (especially if you are using AUTO PLAY CHORD to provide the
accompaniment), or to build up a complex arrangement with several different parts playing together, like
an orchestral score. This instrument’s SEQUENCER has 16 tracks. This means that you can record 16
different parts. However, you don’t have to use all 16 tracks. For some uses you may only need to use
one or two tracks. This instrument’s SEQUENCER enables you to edit your recorded performance. Unlike
a tape recorder you can change the sound or the tempo during playback, or correct wrong notes or timing
errors.
SEQUENCER features
Popular features
You can change the tempo without
Simplified recording method
EASY RECORD is a feature that allows you to
bypass the more complex recording procedures
so you can record and play back your performance quickly and easily.
changing the pitch
When you record your performance at a slow
tempo and play it back at a faster tempo, the
pitch stays the same.
Sequencer
Consistent sound
• You can also record an accompaniment from the AUTO
PLAY CHORD.
Your performance is reproduced by a sound
module as it reads digital data. So, unlike a
recorded tape, the sound never deteriorates no
matter how many times you play back your performance.
Create a one-man ensemble
Use the REALTIME RECORD function to record
your performance in up to 16 tracks and create
your own orchestra or band.
Edit your recorded performance
Store individual data to create your song
For repeating patterns or those especially complicated phrases, the STEP RECORD feature is
convenient for recording the notes one-by-one.
Comprehensive editing functions allow you to
modify your recorded performance. Data can
easily be erased, corrected or copied, providing
an especially convenient tool for creating your
original tunes.
Instant search
A recorded tape has to be rewound, but digital
action means you can return to the beginning of
your performance, or find any measure, instantly.
Memory capacity
Up to 10 songs can be stored in the
SEQUENCER. Expressed in terms of notes, the
total number of notes which can be stored in all
the SEQUENCER songs and tracks is about
40,000. The remaining memory available for
recording is shown on the display as a percentage (MEMORY= %).
• When “Memory full!” appears on the display, no more
data can be stored in the SEQUENCER.
54
QQTG0701
08_Part III.fm 55 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
Sequencer
SEQUENCER menu
<RECORD & EDIT>
The configuration of the SEQUENCER setting
display is as follows.
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
PROGRAM
MENUS
<COPY & PASTE>
• The display looks similar to the following.
<RANGE EDIT>
2. Select SEQUENCER.
• The display looks similar to the following.
Sequencer
• The SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons are used to select a song.
• You can press the NAMING button and assign a name to
the song. (Refer to page 63.)
• You can press the PANEL WRITE button to store the current settings of the instrument at the beginning of the
song. (Refer to page 63.)
3. Select RECORD & EDIT, COPY & PASTE or
RANGE EDIT, and follow the corresponding
procedure.
55
QQTG0701
08_Part III.fm 56 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午前8時14分
Part III
Summary of the SEQUENCER menu items
RECORD & EDIT
These functions are recording and editing
operations used for creating a new performance.
REALTIME RECORD (page 59)
Record each part of your performance just
as you play it on the keyboard.
PUNCH RECORD (page 64)
Correct a selected portion of your recorded
performance.
STEP RECORD (page 65)
Store the sounds note-by-note on the display.
• You can also store the chord, control or rhythm progression for the AUTO PLAY CHORD.
TRACK ASSIGN (page 70)
Assign parts to tracks.
QUANTIZE (page 71)
Correct the timing of your performance.
SONG SELECT (page 64)
Select a song.
SONG CLEAR (page 72)
Erase all the recorded data of a song.
TRACK CLEAR (page 72)
Erase the contents of a specific track.
Sequencer
NOTE EDIT (page 73)
Store and correct performance (NOTE)
data on a piano roll display.
Sequencer
TRACK MERGE (page 76)
Merge the recorded contents of two tracks
and store in a third track.
TRACK CLEAR (page 72)
Erase the contents of a specific track.
SONG CLEAR (page 72)
Erase all the recorded data of a song.
MEASURE COPY (page 76)
Copy the contents of specific measures.
MEASURE ERASE (page 76)
Erase the contents of specific measures.
MEASURE DELETE (page 77)
Delete specific measures from the performance.
MEASURE INSERT (page 77)
Insert additional measures in the performance.
APC TO SMF CONVERT (page 78)
Save automatic accompaniment patterns
data in a Standard MIDI File (SMF).
RANGE EDIT
Change the note position etc. in the recorded
data.
QUANTIZE (page 71)
Correct the timing of your performance.
NOTE CHANGE (page 78)
Change the pitch of specific notes.
DRUM EDIT (page 74)
Store and correct DRUMS part data on a
special display.
VELOCITY CHANGE (page 79)
Modify the recorded velocity (how hard the
keyboard was played) of performance data.
COPY & PASTE
Copy recording data and paste it to the
desired location.
TRANSPOSE (page 79)
Change the key of the performance data.
TRACK COPY (page 75)
Copy data of specific tracks.
SONG COPY (page 75)
Copy data of specific songs.
ADVANCE/DELAY (page 79)
Speed up or delay the sound production of
performance data.
About the measure count
The measure count on the display corresponds to the time signature of the selected rhythm. However,
if rhythm data is stored in the RHYTHM part and that part is played back, the measure count on the display corresponds to the stored rhythm data. (Refer to page 69.)
•
If you wish to use a time signature not available in the preset rhythms, use the COMPOSER to create a new time signature.
(Refer to page 82.)
56
QQTG0701
08_Part III.fm 57 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
Sequencer
Sequencer parts
The following summary explains what is stored in each SEQUENCER part.
Part name
[name on display]
•
•
Used for
Recorded contents
Recording the performance of each part
(REALTIME/STEP)
• Sound and volume settings
• PART EXPRESSION
• Contents of sound and effect settings that can be set
on the MIXER display (Refer to page 104.)
• PITCH BEND, MODULATION data
• Pedal operation
DRUMS [DRM]
(PART 10)
Recording the drums
performance with the
DRUM KITS group
sounds (REALTIME/STEP)
• Sound and volume settings
• PART EXPRESSION
• Contents of sound and effect settings that can be set
on the MIXER display (Refer to page 104.)
CONTROL [CTL]
Recording changes in
the panel button status
(REALTIME/STEP)
• Rhythm setting and selection changes
• RHYTHM VARIATION 1–4 setting
• REVERB on/off
• AUTO PLAY CHORD status, volume balance
• MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER status
• FILL IN 1, 2, INTRO & ENDING 1, 2 on
• PANEL MEMORY selection changes
• TRANSPOSE status
• TECHNI-CHORD status
• START/STOP on/off
• TEMPO setting
• CONDUCTOR status
• FADE IN/OUT operation
• TOTAL EXPRESSION
AUTO PLAY CHORD
[APC]
Recording chords for the
AUTO PLAY CHORD
(REALTIME)
• Chord progression
• AUTO PLAY CHORD status, volume balance
• START/STOP on/off
• FILL IN 1, 2, INTRO & ENDING 1, 2 on
CHORD [CHD]
Recording chord
progression for the
AUTO PLAY CHORD
(STEP)
• Chord progression
• FILL IN 1, 2, INTRO & ENDING 1, 2 on
RHYTHM [RHY]
Settings related to
rhythm (STEP)
• Rhythm settings and selection changes
• RHYTHM VARIATION 1–4 setting
• FILL IN 1, 2, INTRO & ENDING 1, 2 on
• START/STOP on/off
• TEMPO setting
Sequencer
RIGHT1 [RT1]
RIGHT2 [RT2]
LEFT [LFT]
PART1 [P 1]
–PART9 [P 9]
PART11 [P 11]
–PART16 [P16]
You can use the TRACK ASSIGN function to assign parts to tracks as you wish. (Refer to page 70.)
Those items above which are not operations available with this instrument can be recorded only from MIDI input.
57
QQTG0701
08_Part III.fm 58 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
Sequencer
Easy Record
Suppose you are playing your instrument and you wish to record and play back your performance to hear
how it sounds. You can bypass the set-up procedures of the full-scale sequencer and begin recording
quickly and easily.
•
Note that by executing EASY REC, the original data in the selected song number is erased.
Recording procedure
1. Press the EASY REC button to turn it on.
SEQUENCER
PLAY
EASY
REC
4. Press the OK button.
• The display changes to the REALTIME RECORD display.
5. Play the keyboard.
• Recording begins as soon as you start the rhythm or play
the keyboard.
CHORD STEP REC
• The display changes to the following.
6. When you have finished recording, press the
EASY REC button to turn it off.
• The PLAY button turns on.
2. Use the SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
song number in which to record (1 to 10).
• If you press the NAMING button, you can assign a name
to your song. (Refer to page 63.)
Sequencer
3. Set the desired sounds, effects, rhythms, etc.
Playback
1. Press the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL IN 1)
button.
1
FILL IN
SEQUENCER
RESET
2. Press the START/STOP button.
• Your recorded performance is played back automatically.
• When you are finished playing back your performance,
press the SEQUENCER PLAY button to turn it off.
58
QQTG0701
08_Part III.fm 59 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
Sequencer
Realtime Record
With REALTIME RECORD, your performance is recorded with the timing exactly as you played it on the
keyboard. Use this mode to record your performance in up to 16 tracks and create your own orchestra or
band.
Recording procedure
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
• The display looks similar to the following.
on.
• The display changes to the following.
6. Use the buttons below the display to turn on
• When you press the PANEL WRITE button, the PANEL
WRITE display appears. To store the currently active settings, such as the sounds, at the beginning of the song,
press the OK button.
• While you are recording, you can play back tracks which
are already recorded. Press the corresponding balance
buttons to display “PLAY” above the track number you
wish to have played back.
• For the RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT parts, you can
select two or more tracks to record at one time; however,
to record a performance part, the corresponding button in
the CONDUCTOR must also be on. For parts that are not
in the CONDUCTOR, multiple parts cannot be recorded
at one time.
• To record AUTO PLAY CHORD (APC) parts, turn on the
AUTO PLAY CHORD’s OFF/ON button. In this case,
press the START/STOP button when beginning recording.
• The track for the RHYTHM (RHY) part can be selected
for recording only when STEP RECORD is active.
3. Use the SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a
7. Set the sounds, effects, volumes, etc. for the
• The display looks similar to the following.
song number in which to record. (The song
number is shown on the display.)
4. Select RECORD & EDIT.
• The display looks similar to the following.
5. Select REALTIME RECORD.
parts you are going to record.
• If you press the MIXER button, you can use the MIXER
display to visually adjust the settings for each track.
• The LOCAL ON/OFF setting on the MIXER display is
used to specify whether the part assigned to that track
sounds when it is played on the keyboard during recording. For the LOCAL ON/OFF during playback, use the
TRACK ASSIGN display to adjust the settings. (Refer to
page 70.)
• If you are recording GM2 song data, select from the GM2
group in the SOUND EXPLORER.
• The panel settings which are active at the beginning of
recording are stored.
8. Use the TEMPO/PROGRAM to adjust the
recording tempo.
• The tempo is shown on the display as q =.
• If you wish to record the tempo setting and tempo
changes, store them in the control (CTL) part, or use the
step record to store them in the rhythm (RHY) part.
9. Turn the metronome on or off as desired with
the ON/OFF button at the upper right of the
display.
• The metronome selection alternates between ON and
OFF each time the button is pressed.
• When set to ON, the metronome volume setting display is
momentarily shown.
• The metronome sound is not recorded.
(Continued on the next page)
59
QQTG0701
Sequencer
2. Select SEQUENCER.
the “REC” indication above the track numbers
you are going to record.
08_Part III.fm 60 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
10. Play the keyboard.
• Recording begins.
• You can also press the START/STOP button to start the
rhythm and begin recording.
• If the metronome is on, when you press the
START/STOP button, a two-measure count plays, after
which recording automatically begins. In this case, the
rhythm does not start. Recording does not start until the
two-measure count is completed.
• The recording status is continuously updated on the display:
MEASURE= indicates the current measure.
TIME SIG.= indicates the current time signature.
MEMORY= indicates the remaining memory (%) available for recording.
Sequencer
CYCLE RECORD
This mode allows you to have specified recording measures continuously repeated. Thus you
can record measures by adding notes during any
cycle.
1. On the REALTIME RECORD display, specify
“REC” for a track number you are going to
record, and “PLAY” for track numbers you
wish to have played back.
2. Press the CYCLE: OFF button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• If you wish to redo the recording, press the REC STOP
button and then record again. To change the sounds and
effects, etc. please set them again.
• If you make a mistake in recording, you can correct a
specific portion of your performance without having to
redo the whole part. (Refer to page 64.)
11. When you have finished recording, press the
REC STOP button on the display, or turn off
the PROGRAM MENUS button.
3. Use the START MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons
• When the PROGRAM MENUS button is turned off, the
ending command (END) is recorded. Note that, as long
as the ending command is not recorded, blank recording
continues even if you stop playing.
• The SEQUENCER PLAY button turns on.
4. Use the END MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
Multi-track recording
Use the following procedure to record one track
while listening to the track or tracks already
recorded.
Sequencer
1. Follow the procedure to record the first track,
and press the REC STOP button at the end of
the recording.
• The indication for the track just recorded changes from
“REC” to “PLAY”.
to specify the beginning measure number.
specify the ending measure number.
• The measure in which the END command has been
stored can also be specified.
START
1
END
2
3
4
CYCLE END MEASURE: 4
5. Press the START/STOP button.
• If the metronome is on, cycle recording of the specified
measures begins after a two-measure count.
6. Play the keyboard.
• Tracks for which “PLAY” is shown are played back, and
you can record in time with this.
• If you turn on the “REC” for the CONTROL track and
begin recording, the rhythm start will not be recorded.
• The specified measures are repeated, during which time
you can record by adding notes little by little at the correct
timing (over-dubbing).
• If you wish to erase all the performance data from the
specified measures, press the CLEAR button.
• If the CYCLE: ON button is pressed, it changes to OFF.
This button does not function during recording.
• To return to the REALTIME RECORD display, press the
EXIT button.
• Cycle record can also be started from the REALTIME
RECORD display whenever the CYCLE: ON indication is
shown.
4. Press the REC STOP button at the end of the
7. When you have finished recording, press the
2. Turn on the “REC” indication for the track you
wish to record next, and select the sounds and
effects, etc.
3. Press the START/STOP button and begin
recording.
recording.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for other tracks, as
desired.
6. When multi-track recording is finished, turn off
the PROGRAM MENUS button.
• If you wish to store part settings that you modified after
recording as beginning song data, press the MIXER button and follow the PANEL WRITE procedure. (Refer to
page 63.)
60
QQTG0701
REC STOP button on the display, or turn off
the PROGRAM MENUS button.
08_Part III.fm 61 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
Sequencer
Sequencer Play
Play back your recorded performance.
1. Press the SEQUENCER PLAY button to turn
it on.
SEQUENCER
PLAY
EASY
REC
5. If you want to playback a song starting from a
point other than the first measure, use the
MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the measure
number.
• “MEASURE=” indicates the current measure number.
6. Press the START/STOP button.
CHORD STEP REC
• The display looks similar to the following.
• The recorded performance is played back from the specified measure.
• When playback is begun from a measure in which an
INTRO, COUNT INTRO, FILL IN or ENDING is recorded,
the corresponding function does not work.
• You can press the MIXER button and modify the settings
for each part.
• For information about LYRICS, refer to page 91.
7. To stop playback, press the START/STOP
button.
• If the START/STOP button is pressed again, playback
will continue from the point it was interrupted.
2. After pressing the SONG button, use the
SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a song number for playback.
8. When you are finished playing back your performance, press the SEQUENCER PLAY button to turn it off.
3. Use the balance buttons below the display to
show “PLAY” above the track numbers you
wish to have played back.
• Highlighted track numbers indicate tracks that are
already recorded. Only highlighted track numbers can be
selected for playback.
• You can select two or more tracks to play back at one
time.
If a rhythm progression has been recorded in
the RHYTHM (RHY) part, the MEASURE display used in the STEP RECORD and EDIT
displays conforms to the time signature data
stored in the RHYTHM part.
4. Press the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL IN 1)
Sequencer
button.
• The SEQUENCER returns to the beginning of the song
and the beginning panel settings are recalled.
Adjusting the playback tempo
Even with a song having recorded tempo data, you can use TEMPO/PROGRAM or TAP TEMPO to
adjust the tempo to your liking.
• When the tempo is changed, all the tempo data of that song is automatically changed by the same ratio. Accordingly, even in
song data in which tempo change data is stored, a single adjustment of the tempo produces a natural-sounding playback.
• To return to the original tempo, while the song is stopped press the SEQUENCER RESET button. Note that the tempo
change is also canceled when you switch to another song or load a new song.
• The adjusted tempo is canceled when you begin the recording procedure and the original tempo data will be recorded.
61
QQTG0701
08_Part III.fm 62 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
Sequencer
CYCLE PLAY
• The display looks similar to the following.
You can have specified measures played back
repeatedly.
1. On the SEQUENCER PLAY display, specify
“PLAY” for track numbers you wish to have
played back.
2. Press the CYCLE button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Use the START MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons
to specify the beginning measure number.
4. Use the END MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the ending measure number.
2. Specify the order of songs in the medley.
• If ALL is pressed, all the files are selected, and the songs
are played back in order in a medley. If ALL is pressed
again, the files are deselected.
• You can use the buttons below the display to select a
song to add to the song list, then press the ADD button to
add it to the list. Repeat these steps to create your own
list of songs to have played back. M01, M02 etc. next to
the file name indicates its order in the list.
• You can delete a marked file from the medley song list by
selecting it and pressing the ADD button.
• Use the LOOP button to specify ON or OFF for repeat
playback of the medley.
3. Press the START button.
• During medley playback, you can use the SKIP button to
skip to the next song.
• The measure in which the END command has been
stored can also be specified.
START
1
END
2
3
4
CYCLE END MEASURE: 4
5. Press the START/STOP button.
• Cycle playback of the specified measures begins.
• Normally the rhythm pattern is not played back.
Sequencer
6. To stop cycle playback, press the START/
STOP button again.
• During playback stop, if the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL
IN 1) button is pressed, the SEQUENCER returns to the
measure number specified in step 3. If the SEQUENCER
RESET button is pressed again, the SEQUENCER
returns to measure 1.
• If you press the CYCLE: ON button to turn it OFF, cycle
playback is not possible.
• To return to the SEQUENCER PLAY display, press the
EXIT button.
• Cycle playback can also be specified on the
SEQUENCER PLAY display whenever the CYCLE: ON
indication is shown.
MEDLEY
Recorded songs can be played back in a medley.
1. On the SEQUENCER PLAY display, press the
MEDLEY button.
62
QQTG0701
SEQUENCER VOLUME
When playing the keyboard along with a
recorded performance, you can adjust the total
volume of all the playback parts as one.
⇒ Use the APC/SEQUENCER VOLUME slide
control to adjust the volume.
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
MAX
OFF
• Use this control to lower the volume of the recorded playback parts when it is too loud relative to the volume of
your manual performance.
• The volume of all sounds other than your manual performance—MIDI input, etc.—is lowered.
• At the MAX position, the volume of the playback parts
correspond to their current settings; at the OFF position,
the volume is 0.
• The volume can be adjusted for each part. (Refer to page
27.)
• Except during SEQUENCER playback or DIRECT PLAY
of a disk, this slide control adjusts the total volume of all
the automatic accompaniment parts.
• During SEQUENCER recording, the volume is automatically at its maximum regardless of the position of the
slide control. During playback, however, lowering the
slide control from the MAX position will lower the volume
from its recorded level. For this reason, the slide control
should normally be left in the MAX position.
08_Part III.fm 63 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
Sequencer
Naming
Here is the way to assign a name to your recorded song.
1. On the SEQ MENU display use the SONG
SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a song.
2. Press the NAMING button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Use the buttons below the display to assign a
name.
• Set the character input position with the POSITION buttons, select the characters with the alphanumeric buttons
and repeat name assignment.
• Switch from upper to lower case letters with the ABC, abc
button.
• Use the !#$ button to switch to the symbols character set.
• Press the INS button to enter a space at the cursor position.
• Press the DEL button to erase the character at the cursor
position.
• Press the CLR button to erase the entire name.
• Press the →← button to center the name.
4. Press the OK button.
Panel Write
You can change the panel status which is in effect at the beginning of the song. These are the settings
which are recalled when the SEQUENCER RESET button is pressed.
1. On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG ∧
and ∨ buttons to select the song number.
2. Use the panel buttons to change to the
desired panel settings.
3. On the SEQ MENU display, select PANEL
4. Press the OK button.
• “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display.
• PANEL WRITE is automatically activated at the when
you start to record.
• For rhythm data, the data in the RHYTHM part has priority.
WRITE.
Sequencer
• The display looks similar to the following.
63
QQTG0701
08_Part III.fm 64 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
Sequencer
Song Select
You can select a desired song from the list of recorded songs.
1. On the SEQ MENU display, select RECORD
3. Use the SONG SELECT ▲ and ▼ buttons to
& EDIT.
select a song.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select
SONG SELECT.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• The total amount of memory used for the current song is
shown as a percentage (%) to the right of the song name.
• If the NAMING button is pressed, the NAMING display
appears.
• To optimize memory, songs you do not wish to preserve
should be deleted. (Refer to page 72.)
Punch Record
If you make a playing error during REALTIME RECORD or would like to change the recording for some
other reason, you can use the punch recording feature to correct a selected portion of the performance
without having to redo the whole part.
Playing error
Sequencer
Recording the performance
Punch in
Punch out
Replay this portion
Playback
Recording mode
1. On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG
SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the song
number. Then select RECORD & EDIT.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select
PUNCH RECORD.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• On the display “REC” indicates tracks which are being
recorded, and “PLAY” indicates tracks which are being
played back.
4. Use the MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
beginning measure of playback.
• “MEASURE=” indicates the current measure number.
5. Press the START/STOP button to begin playback of the specified track.
6. During playback, press the PUNCH IN button
at the point you want to begin recording.
3. Select the track which contains the portion you
want to correct.
• You cannot select a track in which no data is stored.
64
QQTG0701
• Recording begins as soon as the PUNCH IN button is
pressed. Begin playing at this point.
• The REC indication changes to the PUNCH indication.
• The PUNCH IN button switches to the REC STOP button.
08_Part III.fm 65 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
7. Press the REC STOP button at the point you
want to stop recording.
• Punch recording stops immediately.
• You can also begin punch-in recording by playing the
keyboard.
• You can specify the punch-in/punch-out points with the
Pedal. (Refer to page 120.)
AUTO PUNCH RECORD
You can also set the punch-in and punch-out
points beforehand, so that recording automatically begins and ends at the specified points.
1. On the PUNCH RECORD display, press the
AUTO: OFF button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
Sequencer
4. Use the COUNT IN MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the number of lead-in measures you wish to have played back before the
punch-in measure.
• Set the metronome to on or off with the ON or OFF button.
5. Press the EXIT button.
• The display changes to the PUNCH RECORD display.
6. Press the START/STOP button.
• Playback begins from the measure indicated by MEASURE on the display.
• Pertinent information, such as the FIRST MEASURE, is
shown in the upper section of the display.
7. Correct the performance.
• The mode changes automatically to the recording mode
at the specified FIRST measure. Begin playing at this
point. The mode automatically changes back to the playback mode at the specified LAST measure.
• To discontinue punch recording in the middle, press the
CANCEL button. In this case, the recorded contents up to
that point are erased.
2. Use the FIRST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the number of the punch-in measure.
3. Use the LAST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the number of the punch-out measure.
Step Record
STEP RECORD is simply a method of making a tune by storing the sounds note-by-note on the display.
Instead of playing the keyboard directly as in the REALTIME RECORD mode, you can take your time to
input each single note. This is an especially effective method for storing complicated passages that are
difficult to play or when the exact timing of a part is critical.
Recording procedure
Record the keyboard performance and panel
changes.
• The display changes to the PART SELECT display.
1. On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG
SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the song
number. Then select RECORD & EDIT.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select STEP
RECORD.
3. Use the balance buttons below the display to
specify the track for the part you are going to
record (only one track can be selected at a
time).
(Continued on the next page)
65
QQTG0701
Sequencer
• The number of the LAST measure must be higher than
the number of the FIRST measure.
• The specified measure is recorded.
08_Part III.fm 66 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
Sequencer
• The display changes to the STEP RECORD input display
similar to the following.
• Any panel setting changes—for example changes in the
sound selection, button operation, wheel operation,
etc.—are recorded at the cursor position.
• When a dial is operated, the input value is indicated on
the display. Confirm that this is the correct value and
press the YES button to record the value or the NO button to cancel it.
REST:
To store a rest, after specifying the note
LENGTH, press the REST button.
• If you selected the track to which the CHORD part has
been assigned, the display changes to the STEP
RECORD: CHORD display. (Refer to page 67.)
• If you selected the track to which the RHYTHM part has
been assigned, the display changes to the STEP
RECORD: RHYTHM display. (Refer to page 69.)
• If you selected the track to which the CONTROL part has
been assigned, the display changes to the STEP
RECORD: CONTROL display.
4. Use the MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
measure.
• This step is not necessary if you are recording from measure 1 of a blank track.
5. Use the CURSOR
and buttons to move
the cursor to the note position (dot) you are
going to store.
• Each dot represents one-eighth of a quarter-note (a
thirty-second note).
• When storing triplets, it may not be possible to match the
timing exactly with the 1/32-note steps. However, if you
select triplet-type notes for the note length (LENGTH) in
step 6 below, the timing is automatically corrected.
6. Use the left REC NOTE LENGTH ∧ and ∨
Sequencer
buttons to specify the note value. Select from
r3, r, x3, x, e3, e, q3, q, h, w, w × 2 to 4. (A 3
denotes a triplet-type note.)
• For note values other than these, use the center REC
NOTE LENGTH buttons to specify the note value to be
added to that which you specified with the left buttons.
Example: To record a dotted quarter-note
( q. )
q+e
7. Use the right REC NOTE LENGTH ∧ and ∨
buttons to specify the actual length of the
produced sound for the desired legato or
staccato effect.
TENU (tenuto): Sound is produced for 95%
of the note length.
NORM (normal): 80%
STAC (staccato): 50%
CUTT (cutting): 25%
8. Specify the pitch and velocity of the note by
playing the keyboard.
• The dot on the display where the note is stored changes
to a ∗ mark.
• When recording chords, you can store multiple notes at
one position.
66
QQTG0701
• Positions at which nothing is stored are read as rests.
ERS:
If you make a mistake, move the cursor to
the error, and after displaying the data you
wish to erase, press the ERS button.
BAL:
To specify the volume at the cursor position,
after pressing the BAL button, use the
VALUE buttons to set the volume (0 to 127).
9. Repeat steps 4 through 8 to continue storing
notes.
• To input data on another track, press the button for the
desired track and repeat the procedure from step 2.
10. When you have finished recording, press the
PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it off.
Storing control data
Various control data can be stored at the cursor
position.
1. On the STEP RECORD: MELODY display,
press the CTL button.
2. Use the CTL ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
control data you wish to insert.
• Select from PAN, KEY SHIFT (COARSE TUNE), TUNING (FINE TUNE), BEND SENS.
3. Use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the
numerical value of the setting.
4. Press YES button.
08_Part III.fm 67 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
Sequencer
Correcting the data
1. In the STEP RECORD mode, specify the track
you wish to correct.
Sound data
The name of the sound is displayed. Change the
sound as desired (the sound setting display is
interposed on the current display).
2. Use the MEAS buttons to go to the measure
you wish to modify. Use the CURSOR buttons
to move the cursor to the point ( ∗ ) you wish
to edit.
• The data stored at that point is shown on the display.
• When multiple data is stored at one point, different data is
displayed in order each time a CURSOR button is
pressed. When a chord is recorded, a different note in the
chord is displayed each time a CURSOR button is
pressed.
3. Correct the data.
Control data
The name of the function is displayed. Change
the data as desired.
• Press the ERS button to erase the data which is displayed.
• You can also correct data which was stored in the REALTIME RECORD mode.
• Performance (NOTE) data can be recorded or edited on
a piano roll display, and there is also a specialized display for recording and editing the DRUMS part data.
(Refer to page 73 or 74.)
There are three types of data:
Performance data
NOTE data (note pitch) and VEL data (how hard
the key was played) and LEN data (1 = 1/96 of a
quarter note [ q ]) are displayed. Use the relevant
buttons to correct the data as desired.
Store a chord progression
Store the chord progression for the AUTO PLAY CHORD in the track for the CHORD part. Then, when
the AUTO PLAY CHORD is used during playback, even if you do not specify the chords with your left
hand, the chords change automatically.
The chord length is specified with the CHORD STEP RECORD keys on the keyboard.
Correction keys
Move back one step.
Move forward one step.
DELETE
&
e
q
q.
h
h.
w
Repeat key
Press to end the chord-storing procedure and to specify automatic repeat
playback of the stored progression.
Note value keys
Whole note
w
Dotted half-note
h.
Half-note
h
Dotted quarter-note
q.
Quarter-note
q
Eighth-note
e
End key
Press after the whole chord progression has been stored.
DELETE key
Press to erase data.
DELETE
• To erase all the data from the current track, while
pressing the DELETE key, press the End key
(
).
Reset key
Press to begin storing from the begin&
ning.
67
QQTG0701
Sequencer
•
08_Part III.fm 68 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
Sequencer
Example of storing a chord progression
3
(2) While playing an F chord, press the h key one
time.
Measure 1
2
4
C
C
Am
F
D7
G7
w
w
h
h
h
h
1. On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG
SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the song
number. Then select RECORD & EDIT.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select STEP
RECORD.
• The display changes to the PART SELECT display.
3. Using the balance buttons below the display,
select the track to which the CHORD (CHD/
APC) part has been assigned.
• The display changes to the STEP RECORD: CHORD
input display similar to the following.
h
<Measure 4>
(1) While playing a D7 chord, press the h key one
time.
(2) While playing a G7 chord, press the h key one
time.
• You can press the INTRO & ENDING button or a FILL IN
button on the panel to store the desired pattern at the cursor position. (An INTRO or COUNT INTRO can be stored
only at the beginning.)
• Store a rest by pressing a note value key without specifying a chord.
5. At the end of the chord progression, press the
End key (
).
• The Keyboard exits the recording mode.
• During playback, playback of the recorded chord progression stops at this point. For automatic repeat playback of
the chord progression, press the Repeat key (
)
).
instead of the End key (
• STEP REC: CHORD can also be enabled by pressing on
the EASY RECORD button continuously a few seconds.
This will display the CHORD screen.
4. Store the chords.
Sequencer
<Measure 1, measure 2>
While playing a C chord with your left hand,
press the w key two time with your right hand.
w
• When you play back the track for the CHORD part, the
chords of the automatic accompaniment change in accordance with the stored chord progression.
• To specify chords by the <one finger> mode, select the
BASIC mode before entering the STEP RECORD mode.
• If the ON BASS button is on, chords such as “C on G”
can also be specified (except in the <one finger> mode).
• The CHORD FINDER feature, which shows you how to
finger a specified chord, is available. (Refer to page 47.)
Correct the recorded chord progression
1. Follow the procedure to select the STEP
RECORD: CHORD display.
2. Use the MEAS buttons to go to the measure
• A “beep” tone indicates that the chord has been successfully stored.
• The dot on the display where the chord is stored changes
to a ∗ mark and the cursor automatically moves forward, in
accordance with the specified note value, to the next unrecorded position. The chord name is shown on the display.
<Measure 3>
(1) While playing an Am chord, press the h key
one time.
you wish to modify. Use the and Correction keys to move the cursor to the point (∗)
you wish to edit.
• The lengths of rests are indicated by the respective rest
value × its multiplier.
Example:
Π.................1-beat rest (quarter rest)
‰ ................1/2-beat rest (eighth rest)
Œ × 1 + ‰ ....1-1/2-beat rest
(dotted quarter rest)
Œ × 10........10-beat rest
h
• To go to the end of the chord progression, while pressing
the Reset key ( &
), press the key.
3. Correct the chord data.
68
QQTG0701
08_Part III.fm 69 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
Chord data
When the chord name is displayed at the cursor
position, you can press the DELETE key to
erase the data and then store a new chord.
• If you do not erase the displayed data before entering new
chord data, the new data is inserted at this point, and the
displayed data is merely shifted by the note value of the
new chord.
• Rests can also be erased. Each time the DELETE key is
pressed, the rest is erased in units of Œ × 1. The ‰ rest is
erased last.
• If you wish to cancel the REPEAT, enter an END command.
Sequencer
Control data
The name of the stored function (INTRO, FILL,
etc.) is displayed. You can press the DELETE
key to erase the data which is displayed.
TRACK CLEAR
To erase all data from the current track, press
the CLR button, and then press the YES button
on the confirmation display.
• If you wish to cancel the clear procedure, press the NO
button.
Store a rhythm progression
Changes in the rhythm selection and tempo, as well as the intro, fill-ins and the ending, can be stored by
measures with the step recording method.
1. On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG ∧
and ∨ buttons to select the song number.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to continue storing the
rhythm progression.
Then select RECORD & EDIT.
7. At the end of the rhythm progression, press
RECORD.
• The display changes to the PART SELECT display.
3. Using the balance buttons below the display,
select the track to which the RHYTHM (RHY)
part has been assigned.
• The display changes to the STEP RECORD: RHYTHM
input display similar to the following.
the END button.
• If the REP button is pressed instead of the END button,
during playback the recorded rhythm progression is
repeated.
• The Keyboard exits the recording mode.
Correct the recorded rhythm progression
1. Follow the procedure to select the STEP
RECORD: RHYTHM display.
2. Use the MEAS buttons to go to the measure
you wish to modify. (The ∗ is highlighted.)
3. Correct the rhythm data.
4. Use the MEAS ▲ and ▼ buttons to go to the
measure you wish to record.
5. Store the rhythm data.
• Data which can be stored:
START/STOP
Changes in the rhythm selection
RHYTHM VARIATION 1–4,
COUNT INTRO, INTRO, FILL IN,
ENDING
Tempo changes
• Press the ERS button to erase data at the cursor position.
• If you wish to cancel the REPEAT, enter an END command.
• If you select a rhythm with a different time signature, the
time signature of all subsequent measures will also
change.
• If data has already been recorded in other tracks, you
cannot select a rhythm with a different time signature.
TRACK CLEAR
To erase all data from the current track, press
the CLR button, and then press the YES button
on the confirmation display.
• If you wish to cancel the clear procedure, press the NO
button.
• Be sure to store the START/STOP data in the measure in
which the rhythm starts or stops.
• If you are storing a COUNT INTRO or INTRO, store this
data before the START/STOP data.
• If the tempo is changed, the display changes to the confirmation display. After specifying the desired tempo,
Press the YES button to store the specified tempo, or
press the NO button to cancel the new tempo value.
69
QQTG0701
Sequencer
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select STEP
08_Part III.fm 70 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
Sequencer
Track Assign
Each SEQUENCER part is already assigned to a track number. However, you can use the TRACK
ASSIGN function to assign parts to tracks as you wish.
1. On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG
SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the song
TRACK ASSIGN PRESETS
A preset track assignment can be selected.
number. Then select RECORD & EDIT.
1. On the TRACK ASSIGN display, press the
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select
TRACK ASSIGN.
PRESET button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Use the TR ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the
track.
4. Use the TRACK ASSIGN ∧ and ∨ buttons to
Sequencer
select the part for the specified track.
• When a part other than the CONTROL, APC, CHORD or
RHYTHM part is assigned, the track assign procedure is
completed at this point.
• Either the CHORD part or APC part can be assigned to a
track, but not both.
• The CONTROL, APC, CHORD and RHYTHM parts cannot be assigned to more than one track.
• You can use the ON and OFF buttons for LOCAL CONT.
to specify whether or not the sound of the part assigned
to this track is generated. Because no sound is generated
for this instrument’s parts assigned to tracks set to OFF
through this procedure, use this setting to generate
sound from an external sound source through the MIDI
connectors.
• You can use the MIDI OUT ON and OFF buttons to specify whether or not the data of the part assigned to this
track is sent as MIDI data. When set to OFF, the data is
not sent, even if MIDI equipment is connected.
5. When
assigning the CONTROL, APC,
CHORD or RHYTHM part, press the OK button.
70
QQTG0701
2. Use the SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
song number for which the preset track
assignment will be effective.
• If ALL is selected, the track assignment is effective for all
the songs.
3. Select the track assign mode.
INITIAL:
Factory-preset settings.
TECHNICS MULTI RECORDING:
The optimum track assignment for multiplex
recording.
GM MULTI RECORDING:
The optimum track assignment for creating
GENERAL MIDI data.
4. Press the OK button.
• “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display and the selected
track assign mode is enabled.
• You can confirm the track assignment settings on the
TRACK ASSIGN display.
08_Part III.fm 71 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
Sequencer
Quantize
The QUANTIZE function can correct the timing of your performance after it has been recorded. If the
rhythm is slightly out of sync or inexact, it will automatically be corrected to the specified quantize level.
1. On the SEQ MENU display, select RECORD
& EDIT.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select
QUANTIZE.
• The display looks similar to the following.
7. Use the STRENGTH ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
the amount of quantize (%).
• 100% is a convenient setting. When set to 100%, the performance data is quantized exactly to the level specified
for the VALUE (“just”). For example, at 50%, the data is
quantized to a point that is half that of the just level. By
this setting, you can attain an effect that is very slightly
off-beat from the rhythm.
8. Use the WINDOW ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify
the range (%) affected by the quantize setting.
Example: When VALUE is set to q
Timing of actual
performance
Quantized
performance
3. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify
the track number.
• You cannot select the track for the CONTROL, RHYTHM
or CHORD part.
• If ALL is selected, all the tracks are quantized.
4. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to
e
100%
50%
just
50%
100%
+100%
+50%
+30%
–50%
–30%
–100%
9. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button
to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel
the function.
specify the start point (measure number).
5. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the end point (measure number).
6. Use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
quantize level.
• Select from q, e, e3, x, x3, r, r3. (A 3 denotes a triplettype note.)
71
QQTG0701
Sequencer
Rhythm as written
in the score
• With the increment set to 100 for the VALUE, at a + setting, data close to the just point is corrected, and at a –
setting, data far from the just point is corrected. For
example, if set to –30% the quantize function affects data
far from the just point, and if set to +30% the quantize
function affects data close to the just point. +100% is usually a convenient setting.
• The +100% setting and the –100% setting are the same.
08_Part III.fm 72 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
Sequencer
Song Clear
Erase the recorded contents of all tracks.
1. On tne SEQ MENU display, select RECORD
& EDIT.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, selct SONG
CLEAR.
4. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button
to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel
the function.
• If the YES button is pressed, “COMPLETED!” appears on
the display, the specified songs are erased.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Use the SONG No./ALL ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the number of the song to erase.
• The data size (KB) and the total amount of SEQUENCER
memory or current song memory used is shown as a percentage (%) to the right of the song name.
• If ALL is selected, all the songs recorded in the
SEQUENCER will be erased.
Track Clear
Erase the contents of a specific track.
1. On the SEQ MENU display, select RECORD
Sequencer
& EDIT.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select
TRACK CLEAR.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Use the balance buttons to select the track or
tracks you wish to clear.
• A “CLR” mark is shown for the selected tracks.
72
QQTG0701
4. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button
to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel
the function.
• If the YES button is pressed, the specified tracks are
erased.
08_Part III.fm 73 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
Sequencer
Note Edit
You can edit performance (NOTE) data on a piano roll display. This differs from the normal STEP
RECORD edit procedure, and is a convenient way to check the data for each note.
•
Data other than NOTE data cannot be corrected or recorded. To correct or record other types of data, use the STEP RECORD
display. (Refer to page 65.)
1. On the SEQ MENU display, select RECORD
& EDIT.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select
NOTE EDIT.
3. On the PART SELECT display, select a track.
• The CHORD, RHYTHM and CONTROL tracks cannot be
selected.
• The display looks similar to the following.
6. Select the data to edit (it changes to a highlighted horizontal bar). Edit the data.
• Use the POS ▲ and ▼ buttons to move the timing, the
NOTE ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the note number, the
VEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the velocity (how hard
the keys are played), and the LEN ∧ and ∨ buttons to
change the note length (1 = 1/96 of a quarter note [ q ]).
• Use the GRAPH ▲ and ▼ buttons to view a higher or
lower section of the keyboard (in one-octave steps).
• If the ERS button is pressed, the selected NOTE data is
erased.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 to continue editing.
Inserting note data
You can also store note data on this display.
1. Specify the point where the new note data will
measure you wish to edit.
5. Use the CURSOR and buttons to move
the cursor ( ▼ ) to the point you wish to edit.
• Recorded performance (NOTE) data is shown as horizontal bars. Data selected for editing is highlighted.
• You can use the INC ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the
increment of cursor movement. The resolution can be set
at q /96. However, if NOTE data is present between increments, the cursor will stop.
• Use the POS ▲ and ▼ buttons to change the timing.
• Example: 10.2.48 indicates a point in measure 10, beat 2,
point 48 (one point is 1/96 of a quarter note [ q ]).
•
is shown at the point where the END command is
stored.
be stored.
2. Use the LEN ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
note length.
• Examples of note lengths ( q = 96)
91: tenuto (95%)
76: normal (80%)
48: staccato (50%)
24: cutting (25%)
3. Play a key on the keyboard to specify the note
pitch (NOTE NUMBER) and velocity (how
hard the key is played).
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to input more note data.
73
QQTG0701
Sequencer
4. Use the MEAS ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the
08_Part III.fm 74 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
Sequencer
CYCLE PLAY
You can aurally check the data you are editing by
accessing the CYCLE PLAY display from the
NOTE EDIT display.
3. Use the END MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
• If you wish other tracks to be played back, they should be
selected beforehand on the SEQUENCER PLAY display.
(Refer to page 61.)
• Cycle playback of the specified measures begins.
• If the SOLO button is turned on, playback changes to that
of the recording track only. If it is turned off, all the tracks
specified on the SEQUENCER PLAY display are played
back.
1. On the NOTE EDIT display, press the PLAY
button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
select the last playback measure.
4. Press the START/STOP button.
5. To stop cycle playback, press the START/
STOP button again.
• During playback stop, if the SEQUENCER RESET (FILL
IN 1) button is pressed, the SEQUENCER returns to the
measure number specified in step 2. If the SEQUENCER
RESET button is pressed again, the SEQUENCER
returns to measure 1.
2. Use the START MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons
to select the beginning playback measure.
Drum Edit
The DRUMS part can be edited on a specialized display. This differs from the normal STEP RECORD edit
procedure, and is a convenient way to check the data for each note.
1. On the SEQ MENU display, select RECORD
& EDIT.
2. On the RECORD & EDIT display, select
DRUM EDIT.
• You can use the INC ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the
increment of cursor movement. The resolution can be set
at q /96. However, if NOTE data is present between increments, the cursor will stop.
• Use the POS ▲ and ▼ buttons to change the timing.
Example: 10.2.48 indicates a point in measure
10, beat 2, point 48 (one point is 1/96 of a
quarter note [ q ]).
Sequencer
3. On the PART SELECT display, select the
track for the DRUMS part.
• The CHORD, RHYTHM and CONTROL tracks cannot be
selected.
• The display looks similar to the following.
•
is shown at the point where the END command is
stored.
7. Select the data to edit (it changes to a long
bar). Edit the data.
• Use the POS ▲ and ▼ buttons to move the timing, the
SND ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the percussion instrument sound, and the VEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the
velocity (how hard the keys are played).
• If the ERS button is pressed, the selected NOTE data is
erased.
4. Use the SOUND ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
percussion instrument you wish to edit.
• The number to the left of the instrument name is its MIDI
NOTE NUMBER in the Technics arrangement.
• If sounds other than percussion instrument sounds are
assigned, they are not displayed.
5. Use the MEAS ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the
measure you wish to edit.
6. Use the CURSOR and buttons to move
the cursor (▼) to the point you wish to edit.
• Recorded performance data is shown as vertical bars.
Data selected for editing is highlighted.
74
QQTG0701
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 to continue editing.
08_Part III.fm 75 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
Inserting DRUMS data
You can also store DRUMS data on this display.
1. Specify the point where the new note data will
be stored.
2. Use the VEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
velocity (how hard the key is played).
Sequencer
CYCLE PLAY
You can aurally check the data you are editing by
accessing the CYCLE PLAY display from the
DRUM EDIT display.
• The procedure is the same as for NOTE EDIT.
• If you wish other tracks to be played back, they should be
selected beforehand on the SEQUENCER PLAY display.
(Refer to page 61.)
3. Press the ENTER button to store the data.
• Instead of the ENTER button, you can store data (including velocity data) by playing the keyboard. In this case,
the instrument is that specified on the display, regardless
of which key is played.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to input more DRUMS
data.
Copy and paste the recorded data
You can copy and paste specific portions of the recorded data.
Select the function
1. On the FROM side, use the SONG ∧ and ∨
1. On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG
SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the number
2. On the TO side, use the SONG ∧ and ∨ but-
of the song. Then select COPY & PASTE.
• The display looks similar to the following.
buttons to select the song number you wish to
copy from.
tons to select the song number to copy to.
3. Press the OK button.
TRACK COPY
2. On the COPY & PASTE display, select a function.
Copy the recorded data from specific tracks of a
song.
3. Perform the editing procedures. (See below.)
• During the editing procedure, if the indicator for the
TEMPO/PROGRAM is lit, you can use the TEMPO/PROGRAM dial for the editing function.
SONG COPY
Copy all the recording data of a song to a specific song memory.
1. Specify the track you wish to copy from.
• On the FROM side, use the SONG ∧ and ∨ buttons and
TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a track.
• If ALL is selected, all the tracks of the specified song
number will be copied.
2. Specify the track you wish to copy to (TO
side).
3. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button
to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel
the function.
75
QQTG0701
Sequencer
• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button
to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel
the function.
08_Part III.fm 76 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
• The track assignment settings are also copied. Note that
in some cases, the CONTROL, RHYTHM and CHORD
part data in the destination tracks may be lost.
TRACK MERGE
Sequencer
• If ALL is selected, the specified measures are copied
to all tracks at the same time.
FIRST MEAS:
Specify the first measure to copy.
LAST MEAS:
Specify the last measure to copy.
Merge the recorded contents of two tracks
(source tracks) and store the merged contents in
a third track (destination track).
2. Specify where you wish to copy the selected
• When the TRACK MERGE function is executed, the data
is erased from the two source tracks.
• On the TO side, specify the settings with the corresponding buttons.
measures to.
TRACK:
Specify the track number you wish to copy
to.
• Measures in a track for the CONTROL, RHYTHM or
CHORD part can be copied only to the same track.
1. Select the two source tracks (FROM).
• On the FROM side, use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to
select the two source tracks.
• You cannot select the track to which the CONTROL,
RHYTHM or CHORD part has been assigned.
• If the part assigned to the left source track (“left” meaning
its position on the TRACK MERGE display) is different
from the part assigned to the right source track, when the
parts are merged in the destination track, the new track is
assigned the same part as the left track.
2. Select the destination track (TO).
• Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to the right of the dis-
START MEAS:
Specify the start point to copy the selected
measures to.
REPEAT:
Specify the number of times the selected
measures are to be repeated.
3. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button
to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel
the function.
• Note that if the END command is included in the source
data, it is also copied. Any data following the END command is not copied.
play to specify the track number.
3. Press the OK button.
Sequencer
• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button
to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel
the function.
MEASURE COPY
MEASURE ERASE
Erase the recorded contents of specific measures. You can also specify which type of data is
to be erased.
• Note that only the contents of the measures are erased,
not the measures themselves; the length of the performance remains the same.
Copy recorded data of specified measures to a
specified point.
• On the destination track, the new data replaces the current measure contents.
1. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify
the track number.
1. Specify the measures you wish to copy from
the source track (FROM).
• On the FROM side, specify the settings with the corresponding buttons.
TRACK:
Specify the track number you wish to copy
the measures from.
• You cannot select the track for the RHYTHM part or
CHORD part in which a repeat command has been
stored.
76
QQTG0701
• This function does not work for the RHYTHM part or
CHORD part in which a repeat command has been
stored.
• If ALL is selected, data is erased from the specified measures of all the tracks at one time.
2. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the start point (measure number).
3. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the end point (measure number).
08_Part III.fm 77 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
4. Use the ERASE DATA ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the type of data to be erased.
ALL:
All data is erased.
NOTE:
Only note data is erased.
CONTROL:
Only control data (volume, effect and other
panel settings as well as selection changes)
is erased.
5. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button
to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel
the function.
MEASURE DELETE
Delete specified measures from a track.
• The length of the performance accordingly decreases by
the number of deleted measures.
Sequencer
MEASURE INSERT
Insert specified measures at a specified point.
• The length of the performance accordingly increases by
the number of inserted measures.
1. Specify the measures you wish to copy from
the source track.
• On the FROM side, specify the settings with the corresponding buttons.
TRACK:
Specify the track number you wish to copy
the measures from.
• This function does not work for the CHORD or
RHYTHM track in which the repeat function has been
stored.
• If ALL is selected, the measures are inserted in all
tracks at the same time.
FIRST MEASURE:
Specify the first measure to copy.
LAST MEASURE:
Specify the last measure to copy.
track from which measures are to be deleted.
• This function does not work for the CHORD or RHYTHM
track in which the repeat function has been stored.
• If ALL is selected, the specified measures are deleted
from all the tracks at one time.
2. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons, to
specify the first measure to delete.
3. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the last measure to delete.
4. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button
to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel
the function.
2. Specify where you wish to insert the selected
measures.
• On the TO side, specify the settings with the corresponding buttons.
TRACK:
Specify the track number.
• Measures from the CHORD, RHYTHM or CONTROL
track can only be inserted in the same track.
START MEASURE:
Specify the start point to insert the selected
measures.
REPEAT:
Specify the number of times the selected
measures are to be repeated.
3. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button
to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel
the function.
• Note that if the END command is included in the source
data, it is also inserted. Any data following the END command is not inserted.
77
QQTG0701
Sequencer
1. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
08_Part III.fm 78 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
APC TO SMF CONVERT
This function converts data to Standard MIDI File
(SMF) format, allowing you to play back song
data created using this instrument’s automatic
accompaniment on an external sequencer or
sound generator.
Sequencer
2. Use the APC ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
parts you wish to convert.
• Parts that are set to OFF will not be converted.
3. Press the CONVERT button.
• Note that after the conversion, the APC/CHORD part
data is cleared; if necessary, save this data beforehand.
• A confirmation display appears. Press EXECUTE to continue with the conversion, or press the CANCEL button is
you wish to discontinue.
• After the EXECUTE button is pressed, the conversion
begins. Conversion takes the same length of time as
playback.
• If you wish to discontinue the conversion process midway, press the ABORT button.
1. Use the TR ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the
track you wish to convert.
• In the PART column, the part name currently assigned is
shown.
• In the DATA column, a check mark (√) indicates a track in
which data is stored.
• Tracks in which RHYTHM, CONTROL, APC and CHORD
parts are stored cannot be selected (− − − is shown).
Changing the note position etc. of the
recorded data
You can change the note pitch and position etc. of recorded data.
Select the function
NOTE CHANGE
1. On the SEQ MENU display, use the SONG ∧
and ∨ buttons to select the number of the
Change of pitch of specified notes.
Sequencer
song. Then select RANGE EDIT.
• The display looks similar to the following.
1. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
track you wish to edit.
2. On the RANGE EDIT display, select a function.
3. Perform the editing procedures. (See below.)
• During the editing procedure, if the indicator for the
TEMPO/PROGRAM is lit, you can use the TEMPO/PROGRAM for the editing function.
• You cannot select the track for the CONTROL, RHYTHM
or CHORD part.
• If ALL is selected, all tracks will be edited.
2. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the start point (measure number) of
the note change.
3. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the end point (measure number) of the note
change.
4. Use the TARGET NOTE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the pitch of the note you wish to
change.
• The number next to the note name is its note number.
78
QQTG0701
08_Part III.fm 79 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後5時41分
Part III
5. Use the CHANGE TO ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the pitch you wish to change to.
6. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button
to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel
the function.
VELOCITY CHANGE
Modify the recorded velocity in specific measures of specific tracks.
Sequencer
2. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the start point (measure number) of
the transpose.
3. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the end point (measure number) of the
transpose.
4. Use the TRANSPOSE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the change in pitch.
• Increments are in semitones. A value of 12 is one octave.
A – value lowers the pitch, and a + value raises it.
5. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button
to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel
the function.
ADVANCE/DELAY
1. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
track you wish to edit.
Speed up or delay the sound production of specified performance data.
• You cannot select the track for the CONTROL, RHYTHM
or CHORD part.
• If ALL is selected, all tracks will be edited.
2. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the start point (measure number) of
the velocity change.
ify the end point (measure number) of the
velocity change.
4. Use the VELOCITY ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify
the change in velocity.
• The value you select will be added to or decrease from
the current velocity.
5. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button
to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel
the function.
TRANSPOSE
Change of key of specific measures of specific
tracks.
1. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
track you wish to edit.
• You cannot select the track for the CONTROL, RHYTHM
or CHORD part.
• If ALL is selected, all tracks will be edited.
2. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the start point (measure number) of
the change.
3. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the end point (measure number) of the
change.
4. Use the ADVANCE/DELAY ∧ and ∨ buttons
to accelerate or delay the timing of the sound
production (–96 to +96).
• A + value causes the notes to sound later, and a – value
causes the notes to sound earlier.
5. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button
to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel
the function.
1. Use the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
track you wish to edit.
• You cannot select the track for the CONTROL, RHYTHM
or CHORD part.
• If ALL is selected, all tracks will be edited.
79
QQTG0701
Sequencer
3. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to spec-
09_Part IV.fm 80 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時25分
Part IV Composer
Outline of the Composer
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
SAX &
ORGAN &
GUITAR &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
3
4
1
VARIATION
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
The COMPOSER enables you to create your own accompaniment patterns. A pattern is comprised of 8
parts: DRUMS 1, 2, BASS and ACCOMP1–5 parts. These parts would form the backing of a song.
Rhythm components which can be stored
Different INTRO 1, 2, VARIATION 1 to 4, FILL IN
1, 2 patterns can be created for each MEMORY
(A, B, C).
• Each VARIATION is made of a PATTERN, FILL 1 and
FILL 2.
• A Maj (major) and Min (minor) pattern is available for
each of the INTRO and ENDING 1 and 2.
INTRO
VARI 1
VARI 2
VARI 3
VARI 4
ENDING
1 Maj
1 Min
2 Maj
2 Min
PATTERN
FILL IN 1
FILL IN 2
PATTERN
FILL IN 1
FILL IN 2
PATTERN
FILL IN 1
FILL IN 2
PATTERN
FILL IN 1
FILL IN 2
1 Maj
1 Min
2 Maj
2 Min
Memory capacity
COMPOSER menu
Expressed in terms of notes, the total number of
notes which can be stored in all the COMPOSER
memories is about 13,000. The remaining memory available for recording is shown on the
recording display as a percentage (%).
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
• The display looks similar to the following.
Composer
• When “Memory full!” appears on the display no more data
can be stored in the COMPOSER.
䡲 MEMORY
Because the contents of the MEMORY are
erased after the power is turned off, you should
save the data on disks if you wish to keep it.
(Refer to page 97.)
80
QQTG0701
2. Select COMPOSER.
• The display looks similar to the following.
09_Part IV.fm 81 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時25分
Part IV
Composer
Summary of the COMPOSER menu items
RECORDING MEMORY-A
Create a memory in the MEMORY A bank.
PATTERN COPY (page 88)
Copy a rhythm pattern into a memory.
RECORDING MEMORY-B
Create a memory in the MEMORY B bank.
SEQ TO COMPOSER COPY (page 89)
Copy recorded data in the SEQUENCER to
the COMPOSER.
RECORDING MEMORY-C
Create a memory in the MEMORY C bank.
EASY COMPOSER
Create a rhythm pattern with a simplified
procedure.
LOAD SINGLE COMPOSER
Recall the desired COMPOSER data from
data saved on a disk. This procedure is the
same as when COMPOSER is selected for
SINGLE LOAD. (Refer to page 93.)
Three ways to record in the COMPOSER
There are three ways to create and record a
rhythm.
䡲 Simple recording method
Use EASY COMPOSER to quickly create a
unique rhythm just by selecting a pattern for
each part.
䡲 Pattern Copy (page 88)
Copy a preset rhythm or SEQUENCER data to a
COMPOSER memory, edit it as you like, and
then store it as a new rhythm.
䡲 Create a completely new rhythm (page 82)
Compose all the parts of a completely new
rhythm from scratch.
• You can use either realtime recording or step record for
any part of the recording.
Simple recording method
With EASY COMPOSER you can easily create a unique rhythm pattern by selecting a different style for
each part of the rhythm.
1. On the COMPOSER MENU display, select
EASY COMPOSER.
4. Use the STYLE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a
style.
• The display looks similar to the following.
5. Use the VARI ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 to select styles for the
2. Use the MEM ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
memory in which to record your rhythm.
• Select from A-vari 1 to 4, B-vari 1 to 4 and C-vari 1 to 4.
3. Use the PART ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the
part.
• In the EASY COMPOSER, the new rhythm pattern is
divided into 9 parts, to each of which a style and variation
is assigned.
other parts.
7. Press the SET button.
• The rhythm pattern is played back.
• If you are not satisfied with the rhythm pattern, repeat
steps 3 to 7.
• If you wish to correct the sounds or phrases in your
rhythm pattern, press the EDIT button. The display
changes to the recording display. (Refer to page 83.)
• For playback, refer to page 85.
81
QQTG0701
Composer
variation number.
• The number of variations differs depending on the
selected style.
• A part which is set to OFF does not sound. Note that the
“BsDrum&Snare” part cannot be set to OFF.
09_Part IV.fm 82 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時25分
Part IV
Composer
Create a completely new rhythm
Clear the memories and compose a completely new rhythm from scratch.
•
You can also use this method when copying a pattern from a preset rhythm or the SEQUENCER.
Prepare to record
1. On the COMPOSER MENU display, select a
memory in which to record (RECORDING
MEMORY A, B, or C).
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the buttons below the display to select the
pattern you want to create.
• If the MEM CLR button is pressed, all the current contents of the MEMORY (A/B/C) are erased (a confirmation
display appears).
• You can press the NAMING button and assign a name to
the MEMORY.
5. Press the YES button.
• All the data for the selected pattern is erased.
6. Press the MEASURE SETTING button.
7. Use the MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the number of measures in your new
rhythm pattern (1 to 16).
8. Use the TIME SIGNATURE ∧ and ∨ buttons
to specify the meter of the pattern (1/4 to
8/4).
• When the settings for the MEASURE and TIME SIGNATURE of the INTRO or ENDING patterns are changed,
the Maj and Min settings change at the same time.
9. Press the OK button.
10. Press the EXIT button.
• To assign a name to each VARIATION, press the VARI
button and select a number.
3. On the RECORD MEMORY display, press the
OK button.
Composer
• The display looks similar to the following.
4. Press the CLEAR THE ENTIRE PATTERN
button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
82
QQTG0701
09_Part IV.fm 83 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時25分
Part IV
KEY SETTING
Set the key and chord in which you wish the
recorded pattern to be played. If the recorded
performance is played in a key or chord different
from this setting, the automatic accompaniment
will not be able to distinguish the correct chord.
Composer
• For the ACCOMP and BASS parts, select sounds from
groups other than the DIGITAL DRAWBAR sound
groups.
• The sounds marked with # represent special guitar performances and changing them to other sounds may
result in an unnatural, awkward sound expression.
4. Record the part.
1. On the RECORDING display press the KEY
SETTING button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the KEY ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the key.
Use the CHORD ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the
chord type (Maj/Min).
3. When you have finished making the settings,
press the EXIT button.
Recording procedure
• The specified number of measures are repeatedly played
back, during which time any newly played notes are
added to those already recorded. The current measure
number is shown on the display as “MEASURE=”.
• Record the performance in C major for correct chord progressions during playback. Follow the KEY SETTING
procedure if you wish to record the performance in a different scale.
• The sustain pedal operation or PITCH BEND and MODULATION effects when MIDI data is received are also
recorded (except for the DRUMS part).
䡲 Button functions
PART BALANCE:
Adjust the volume of each part on the PART
BALANCE display. (These settings are not
recorded.)
PART SETTING:
You can make detailed settings for each part.
(Refer to page 84.)
play, select the rhythm part you want to record
first.
BAS: BASS
AC1–5: ACCOMP 1–5
DR1, 2: DRUMS 1, 2
• The metronome sound starts and the display looks similar to the following.
SOLO:
Mute all parts except the part which is currently being recorded.
• A MUTE mark is shown for the other parts on the display.
• To turn off the SOLO function, press this button again.
PART CLR:
Erase all recorded contents of the currently
selected part.
NOTE CLR:
Data is erased one note or one percussion
instrument (DRUMS part) sound at a time.
2. Adjust the tempo.
• The tempo is shown on the display as q =.
• The tempo can be freely adjusted when you play back
the rhythm pattern, so record at the tempo which is easiest for you to play.
3. Select the sound.
• Hold and press this button, and press the keyboard key
that corresponds to the note or percussion instrument
(DRUMS part) sound you wish to erase.
ALL ERAS:
The performance recorded in the selected part
is erased for as long as this button is pressed.
(Continued on the next page)
• For the DRUMS part, only sounds from the DRUM KITS
sound group can be selected.
83
QQTG0701
Composer
1. In the START RECORDING area on the dis-
STEP RECORD:
Change to the STEP RECORD mode. (Refer
to page 86.)
09_Part IV.fm 84 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時25分
Part IV
QUANTIZE:
Smooth out any unevenness in the timing of
your performance.
Composer
6. When you have finished recording the rhythm,
turn off the PROGRAM MENUS button.
• Before recording, select the note value for the desired
quantize level. (The quantize level is shown on the display as QUANTIZE=.)
KEY IN CHORD MODIFY <PAGE 2/2> (except
for INTRO, ENDING, DRUMS):
Use the GROUP and TYPE ∧ and ∨ buttons
to select the type of pattern progression.
• This setting is for the sound that is going to be recorded
from this time.
5. Use the buttons below the display to switch to
a different recording part, and proceed to
record each part in turn.
Chord Modify Change
For data that has already been recorded, you can select the type of pattern progression for the bass and
accomp parts.
•
This function cannot be used for the INTRO and ENDING patterns.
1. On the RECORDING display, press the
CHORD MODIFY CHANGE button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• If a progression type for which the note name is displayed
(in C key) was selected for the chord group, played notes
which are not displayed are changed to notes which are
displayed.
4. Use the FUNCTION ∧ and ∨ buttons to
enable or disable the function.
KEEP: No change.
CHANGE: The change is enabled.
5. When you have finished making the settings
2. Use the PART ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the
part you wish to set.
for each part, press the OK button.
6. Press the EXIT button.
3. Use the GROUP and MODIFY TYPE ∧ and ∨
Composer
buttons to select the corresponding progression type.
Part Setting
You can make detailed settings for each part.
1. On the REALTIME RECORDING display,
press the PART SETTING button.
• The settings comprise 3 pages of the display. Use the
PAGE buttons to switch pages.
2. Use the PART ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a
part.
3. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the corresponding item.
84
QQTG0701
<PAGE 1>
09_Part IV.fm 85 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時25分
Part IV
Composer
PITCH POINT:
The pitch at which the pattern progression
sound is lowered by one octave.
REV:
Depth of the REVERB (0 to 127).
• When the root note of the specified chord is higher than
the set pitch point, the pitch of that part is automatically
lowered by one octave, thus avoiding an unnaturally high
accompaniment pitch.
• This is effective only for the part for which the Melody
group was selected in CHORD MODIFY CHANGE.
CHO:
Depth of the CHORUS (0 to 127).
BEND RANGE:
Adjust the range of pitch change when the
PITCH BEND data is received (0 to 12).
SOUND:
Use the panel buttons to select the sound.
<PAGE 3>
DIGI EFF:
Set the DIGITAL EFFECT to on or off.
• (SOUND) is the initialized setting of the sound.
<PAGE 2>
EQ-Hi:
Sound correction in the high range.
• Use the FC ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the standard frequency. Use the GAIN ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the ratio of
change.
BALANCE:
Adjust the volume balance.
EQ-Low:
Sound correction in the low range.
PAN:
Adjust the stereo balance of each part (LEFT
64 – CENTER – RIGHT 63).
• Use the FC ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the standard frequency. Use the GAIN ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the ratio of
change.
• At “LEFT 64”, the sound is all the way to the left, at
“RIGHT 63” all the way to the right. The center point is
CENTER.
Playback
1. In the RHYTHM GROUP section, press the
• The display looks similar to the following.
MEMORY button.
RHYTHM GROUP
ROCK
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
FUNK &
SOUL
USA
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
LOAD
Composer
METRONOME POP
2. Select the desired memory (A/B/C).
3. Use the VARIATION buttons to select a variation.
4. Press the START/STOP button.
• The DRUMS part begins to play back.
• The BASS and ACCOMP parts are played back when
you use the AUTO PLAY CHORD.
85
QQTG0701
09_Part IV.fm 86 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時25分
Part IV
Composer
Step Record
Use STEP RECORD to store the notes one-by-one on the display. This is a convenient way to store complicated patterns that are difficult to play.
Recording procedure
1. While you are recording, press the STEP
RECORD button.
• The display changes to the STEP RECORD display similar to the following.
6. Specify the pitch and velocity of the note by
playing the keyboard.
• The dot on the display where the note is stored changes
to a ∗ mark.
• When recording chords, you can store multiple notes at
one position.
REST:To store a rest, after specifying the note
LENGTH, press the REST button.
• Positions at which nothing is stored are read as rests.
2. Use the CURSOR buttons to move the cursor
to the note position you are going to store.
• Each dot represents one-eighth of a quarter-note (a
thirty-second note).
• When storing triplets, it may not be possible to match the
timing exactly with the 1/32-note steps. However, if you
select triplet-type notes for the note length (LENGTH) in
step 4 below, the timing is automatically corrected.
3. Use the PAGE button to access the PAGE 2/2
display.
4. Use the left LENGTH buttons to specify the
note value. Select from r3, r, x3, x, e3, e, q3, q,
h, w, w × 2 to 4. (A 3 denotes a triplet-type
note.)
Composer
• For note values other than these, use the right LENGTH
buttons to specify the note value to be added to that
which you specified with the left buttons.
Example: To record a dotted quarter-note (q.)
q+e
5. Use the PHRS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
actual length of the produced sound for the
desired legato or staccato effect.
TENU (tenuto):
Sound is produced for 95%
of the note length.
NORM (normal): 80%
STAC (staccato): 50%
CUTT (cutting): 25%
86
QQTG0701
ERS:If you make a mistake, move the cursor to
the error, and after displaying the data
you wish to erase, press the ERS button.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to continue storing
notes.
• To record a different part, use the PART ∧ and ∨ buttons
to select another part.
• The NOTE, VELOCITY, LENGTH, CHORD MODIFY and
CONTROL can be revised later. Press the OK button
after the revision.
• You can easily switch between the REALTIME mode and
the STEP mode any time during recording. To return to
the realtime recording display during the STEP RECORD
mode, press the EXIT button.
09_Part IV.fm 87 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時25分
Part IV
Composer
Measure Edit
You can edit the recorded data one measure at a time.
Select the function you wish to edit.
1. During recording, press the MEASURE EDIT
button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
START MEASURE:
Specify the start point to copy the selected
measures to.
3. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button
to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel
the function.
• If the FROM and TO parts are the same and the FROM
and TO measures overlap, copy is not possible.
MEASURE ERASE
2. Select the function.
3. Follow the procedure to edit the function (see
below).
Erase the recorded contents of specific measures.
• Note that only the contents of the measures are erased,
not the measures themselves; the length of the performance remains the same.
• Only the contents of the same pattern can be edited.
MEASURE COPY
Copy recorded data of specified measures to a
specified point.
• On the destination track, the new data replaces the current measure contents.
1. Use the PART ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
part.
• If ALL is selected, data is erased from the specified measures of all the parts at one time.
2. Use the FIRST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the start point (measure number).
1. Specify the measures you wish to copy from
3. Use the LAST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the end point (measure number).
the source track (FROM).
PART:
Select the part to copy from. (If ALL is
selected, all parts are copied.)
4. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button
to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel
the function.
Composer
• On the FROM side, specify the settings with the corresponding buttons.
FIRST MEASURE:
Specify the first measure to copy.
LAST MEASURE:
Specify the last measure to copy.
2. Specify where you wish to copy the selected
measures to.
• On the TO side, specify the settings with the corresponding buttons.
PART:
Select the part to copy to.
87
QQTG0701
09_Part IV.fm 88 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時25分
Part IV
Composer
MEASURE DELETE
MEASURE INSERT
Delete specified measures from all parts at once.
Insert blank measures at a specified point.
• The length of the performance accordingly decreases by
the number of deleted measures.
• The length of the performance accordingly increases by
the number of inserted measures.
1. Use the FIRST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons, to
1. Use the FIRST MEASURE button to select the
specify the first measure to delete.
2. Use the LAST MEASURE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the last measure to delete.
• One measure is the smallest unit that can be deleted.
point (measure) where the measures are to be
inserted.
2. Use the NUMBER OF MEASURE button to
select the number of blank measures to insert.
• No more than 16 measures total can be inserted.
3. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button
to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel
the function.
• When the INTRO or ENDING measures are deleted, the
Maj and Min data are erased at the same time.
3. Press the OK button.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button
to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel
the function.
• The Maj or Min data is inserted in the INTRO and ENDING at the same time.
Pattern Copy
Use this function to copy a pattern from a rhythm or from SEQUENCER data.
PATTERN COPY
Copy a rhythm to the COMPOSER.
• You can also copy a pattern from the MEMORY.
1. On the COMPOSER MENU display, select
PATTERN COPY.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Select the memory you wish to copy to.
• In the TO box, specify the settings with the corresponding
buttons.
MEMORY: Memory name (A, B or C)
PATTERN: Pattern name
Composer
•If ALL is selected, all the patterns are copied.
4. Press the OK button.
• When copying has been successfully completed, “COMPLETED!” appears on the display.
• If you wish to use the COMPOSER functions to edit the
copied data, press the EDIT button, and follow the procedure to record a pattern.
2. Select the pattern you wish to copy.
• In the FROM box, specify the settings with the corresponding buttons.
GROUP: Group name
RHYTHM: Rhythm name
PATTERN: Pattern name
•If ALL is selected, all the patterns are copied.
88
QQTG0701
09_Part IV.fm 89 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時25分
Part IV
䡲 Copying individual parts
1. Use the PAGE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
PAGE 2/2.
• The display looks similar to the following.
Composer
6. Use the TRANSPOSE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
change the key of the copied measures (−24
to +24).
• Units are in semitones.
7. Use the MEMORY ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify
the COMPOSER memory to copy to.
8. Use the PATTERN ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify
the pattern to copy to.
9. For each COMPOSER part, specify the
2. On the FROM side, use the buttons to specify
the part to copy from.
• For the DRUM part you can specify the DRUMS 1 or 2
part; for other parts you can specify a part other than a
DRUMS part.
3. Specify the destination on the TO side to
which the part will be copied.
4. Press the OK button.
SEQ TO COMPOSER COPY
SEQUENCER track from which to copy data.
• Use the PART ▲ and ▼ buttons to specify the part name,
and the TRACK ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the track
number.
• Parts which are set to OFF are blank.
10. Press the OK button.
• “COMPLETED!” is shown on the display.
• If you wish to use the COMPOSER function to edit the
copied data, press the EDIT button, and follow the procedure to record a pattern.
• In the case of INTRO or ENDING, if a measure contains
a Maj or Min command, it is reproduced in the other pattern as well.
Data from the SEQUENCER can be copied to a
COMPOSER memory. For example, you can
use a rhythm pattern on a song disk as the automatic accompaniment for your own performance.
1. Play back the song you wish to copy from
SEQUENCER to confirm the tracks, the measures and the time signature you wish to copy.
2. Follow the procedure in “Prepare to record” to
prepare the COMPOSER memory you will be
copying to. (Refer to page 82.)
• Be sure that time signature setting in the SEQUENCER
data you are copying from and the time signature in the
COMPOSER memory you are copying to are the same,
or the data will not be copied successfully.
3. On the COMPOSER MENU display, select
SEQ TO COMPOSER COPY.
Composer
• The display looks similar to the following.
4. Use the FIRST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the number of the first measure to
copy.
5. Use the LAST MEAS ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the number of the last measure to copy.
89
QQTG0701
10_Part V.fm 90 ページ
2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後8時41分
Part V Disk Drive
Outline of the Disk Drive function
The Disk Drive enables you to store recorded and stored data from this instrument’s memories on disks,
as well as play commercial recorded disks on this instrument.
Internal memory and Disk Drive
The storable internal memory of this instrument
as well as the backup time are limited. However,
the Disk Drive maximizes your control of data
management by allowing you to store (SAVE)
this instrument’s data on disks, and then to recall
(LOAD) it at any time.
Floppy Disk Drive
• The BACK UP data will not be erased even with the passage of time.
䡲 The following data can be saved/loaded:
SAVE
LOAD
PERFORMANCE
CURRENT PANEL (The current panel settings)
PANEL MEMORY
SEQUENCER
COMPOSER (MEMORY contents)
Floppy disk
SOUND MEMORY
EFFECT MEMORY
BACKUP
MIDI & FAVORITES
• When creating or saving song data, it is recommended
that you use the performance data in the PERFORMANCE group.
• Instead of using MIDI & FAVORITES as frequently
loaded and saved data, it is recommended that you save
it with other data as backup data.
• The SEQUENCER contents can be saved in one-song
increments (SEQUENCER SONG SAVE).
• Please use 2HD disks to load/save BACKUP data.
Main parts of the Disk Drive
Disk slot
Eject button
Press to remove the disk from the Disk Drive.
• You can use 3.5 inch 2DD (720 KB) or 2HD (1.44 MB)
disks; however, 2HD disks formatted as 2DD cannot be
used.
Eject button
Disk Drive
This indicator is lit continuously
as long as the power is on.
90
QQTG0701
10_Part V.fm 91 ページ
2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後8時41分
Part V
Disk Drive
Using commercial song disks
Playback of commercial song disks
Not only disks recorded on this instrument, but
also data from commercial song disks can be
read on this instrument.
DIRECT PLAY lets you enjoy playing commercially sold song disks directly from a disk. It’s fast
because you don’t have to load the disk data into
your instrument’s memory.
TECHNICS File format
Standard MIDI File format
䡲 Loading Technics File format disks
Using Technics file format disks allows you load
SOUND EDIT, rhythm & accompaniments,
PANEL MEMORY and Song data into your
instrument to expand its potential even further.
䡲 About Standard MIDI Files
“Standard MIDI File” (SMF) is a standardized
data format which makes it possible for music
data to be exchanged among different sequencers. Data stored in this format on sequencers of
different models can be played back on this
instrument, and vice versa. Note, however, that
Standard MIDI Files ensure the compatibility of
data such as NOTE data (keyboard performance
data), VELOCITY (how hard the keyboard is
played), PROGRAM NUMBER data (voice number data), etc. Because it does not guarantee
100% faithful reproduction of recorded music
which is replete with such data, it may be necessary for you to adjust the settings to your satisfaction.
• Only files with the “.MID” extension can be loaded.
• Standard MIDI File FORMAT 1 can be loaded, but not
saved.
• This instrument’s SEQUENCER data can be saved to a
disk in Standard MIDI File (FORMAT 0) and can be used
by other equipment.
• DIRECT PLAY is possible from the following disks:
Standard MIDI File
Standard MIDI File with Lyrics
DISK ORCHESTRA
COLLECTION™ (DOC)
PianoDisc™
*All product and company names are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective owners.
*DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION is a trademark of
the YAMAHA Corporation.
䡲 SMF with LYRICS
SMF with LYRICS is a format in which character
information that is included with the MIDI data,
such as karaoke lyrics, can be displayed. This
instrument supports this format, making it possible to view the lyrics on the display while a performance is played back.
䡲 GENERAL MIDI LEVEL 2 (GM2)
This instrument complies with GENERAL MIDI
(GM) LEVEL 2 standards. GM LEVEL 2 is a uniform world standard for MIDI sound generators
that improves on existing GM standards, in order
to realize an enhanced performance expression.
Sound generators of this class can reproduce virtually the identical conditions that were in effect
at the time of recording.
Equipment which conforms to GENERAL MIDI
LEVEL 2 standards is indicated by the following
logo.
• This instrument also conforms to GENERAL MIDI playback.
Disk Drive
• This instrument accepts the following file formats:
91
QQTG0701
10_Part V.fm 92 ページ
2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後8時41分
Part V
Disk Drive
Outline of the procedure
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
SAX &
ORGAN &
GUITAR &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
VARIATION
3
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
1. Insert the disk into the Disk Drive slot. Push it
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
■ About the menu
all the way in until you hear a click.
• On this instrument, if the normal display is active, it automatically changes to the DISK MENU display when a disk
is inserted into the Disk Drive (initialized settings). The
PREFERENCES menu is used to specify which display is
shown when a disk is inserted.
2. Select a menu on the DISK MENU display.
• If the DISK MENU display does not appear, turn on the
DISK button.
3. Follow the procedure for the function (see
below).
• When function is being set, if the TEMPO/PROGRAM
indicator is lit, the TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for
setting the current function.
LOAD (page 93)
Load data from a disk into this instrument’s
memory.
SAVE (page 97)
Save data from this instrument’s memory to a
disk.
4. When you have finished setting the functions,
turn off the DISK button.
DISK
DISK
IN USE
SONG MEDLEY (page 96)
Medley playback of songs in the disk (Technics format).
LOAD
䡲 DISK IN USE
DISK
DISK
IN USE
LOAD
This indicator lights when data is being loaded or
saved.
• To prevent data loss, do not eject the disk or turn off the
power while this indicator is lit.
DISK IN USE
DISK
E
IN US
DISK
Disk Drive
LOAD
92
QQTG0701
DIRECT PLAY (page 95)
Direct playback of SMF etc. commercial song
disks and medley playback.
DISK TOOLS (page 99)
Disk management procedures, such as disk
format.
PREFERENCES (page 100)
Used to specify which screen is to be jumped
to as well as the preferred file when a disk is
inserted.
10_Part V.fm 93 ページ
2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後8時41分
Part V
Disk Drive
Loading data
Recall (load) the data from the disk to this instrument’s memories.
•
Note that the load procedure causes any data which is currently stored in the relevant memories to be erased.
LOAD
Load data that saved to a disk into this instrument’s memory.
• The display looks similar to the following.
1. Insert the disk with the stored data into the
Disk Drive. Push it all the way in until you hear
a click.
2. Use the buttons below the display to specify
the types of data you wish to load (YES/NO).
• - - - - - indicates that this type of data has not been saved.
• This setting is canceled when you quit the LOAD display
or when another file is selected.
2. On the DISK MENU display, select LOAD.
3. Press the LOAD button.
• The LOAD operation begins.
• The display looks similar to the following.
䡲 SINGLE LOAD
You can specify which data to load from a disk
into a specific PANEL MEMORY, COMPOSER
(MEMORY), SOUND MEMORY, EFFECT
MEMORY or SEQUENCER (when SONG SAVE
was executed) memory.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to access the PAGE
• If there are only SMF files on the disk, the display automatically changes to the SMF LOAD display.
3/3 SINGLE LOAD display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Use the buttons below the display to select the
song (Technics file) you wish to load.
• If there are SMF files on the disk and you wish to load an
SMF file, press the SMF button. (Refer to next page.)
4. Press the LOAD button.
䡲 LOAD OPTION
Specify the kind of data you wish to load from the
disk to your instrument.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to access the PAGE
2. Use the MODE button to select the data you
wish to load.
3. Use the BANK/SINGLE button to select the
load increment. (except for SEQUENCER)
BANK:
Load one bank at a time.
SINGLE:
Load the smallest data increment.
4. Follow the appropriate procedure to load the
specified data.
• Specify the data source for SONG (left side), and the
data destination (this instrument’s memory location) for
TO.
2/3 LOAD OPTION display.
93
QQTG0701
Disk Drive
• The LOAD operation begins.
• When the operation has been successfully completed,
“COMPLETED!” is shown on the display.
• If song data was loaded, you can press the
START/STOP button to begin playback when the
SEQUENCER PLAY display is active.
• You can load the type of data for which only one song
can be recorded in the SEQUENCER. (This type is available for disks used with older Technics models.) Note,
however, that in this case, the song is loaded into SONG
1, but the data in SONG memories 2 to 10 are erased.
• You can also access the LOAD display by pressing the
DISK button for a few seconds.
10_Part V.fm 94 ページ
2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後8時41分
Part V
䡲 SMF LOAD
Load data which was saved in the “Standard
MIDI File” (SMF) format.
1. On the LOAD (PAGE 1/3) display, press the
Disk Drive
5. Press the LOAD button.
• The LOAD operation begins.
• When the operation has been successfully completed,
“COMPLETED!” is shown on the display.
• If you press the START/STOP button, playback of the
loaded data begins.
SMF button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• During the LOAD operation, data that cannot be processed by this instrument is ignored.
䡲 COMPOSER LOAD
Load COMPOSER data only from a disk.
1. In the RHYTHM GROUP section, press and
hold the LOAD (MEMORY) button for a few
seconds.
• For disks which contain SMF files only, this display
appears automatically when LOAD is selected on the
DISK MENU display.
RHYTHM GROUP
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
2. Use the buttons below the display to select the
filename you wish to load.
• If the number of files is 10 or more, you can use the
PREV and NEXT buttons to go back or advance 10 files
at a time.
• If you press the TECH button, the display changes to the
LOAD display for Technics format.
• You can use the INFORMATION button to switch the displayed data.
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
USA
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
LOAD
• The display looks similar to the following.
DISK: Disk name
SONG: Song name
3. Use the TO SONG button to select the number to load to (this instrument’s SEQUENCER
song number).
• Songs to load are specified one at a time.
• The song name to load to is shown below the TO SONG
button.
4. Use the LOAD AS button to specify the load
Disk Drive
method.
Select from the following.
GM/GM2 → GM2:
Activate the GM2 initialized settings, and
load GM/GM2 data.
NX → NX:
Active the NX SOUND settings, and load
NX data.
GM/GM2 → NX:
Activate the NX SOUND initialized settings,
and load GM/GM2 data.
PREV. TEC → NX:
Activate the NX SOUND initialized settings,
and load SMF data that was saved in the
TECHNICS mode on a previous model.
(The volume balance and octave settings
may differ from the saved settings.)
• If you select the setting which is different from that in
which the song was stored, the sounds, octaves, and
arrangement of percussion instrument sounds, etc. will
be different.
94
QQTG0701
2. Select the name of the file you wish to load.
3. Press the LOAD button.
• Data is loaded to this instrument’s COMPOSER memory
(MEMORY).
10_Part V.fm 95 ページ
2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後8時41分
Part V
Disk Drive
Direct Play
You can enjoy immediate playback of “Standard MIDI File” (SMF), “Disk Orchestra Collection” (DOC) and
“PianoDisc” disks—all without loading the song data.
1. Insert the disk with the stored data into the
䡲 The display during playback
Disk Drive.
<Example: SMF>
2. On the DISK MENU display, select DIRECT
PLAY.
• The display looks similar to the following.
<Example: SMF>
3. Use the buttons below the display to select the
song you wish to have played.
• If the number of files is 10 or more, you can use the
PREV and NEXT buttons to go back or advance 10 files
at a time.
• For SMF files, use the PLAY AS button to specify a
sound arrangement mode.
GM2: GENERAL MIDI LEVEL 2
NX: NX SOUND
PREV. TEC: Data from Technics instruments
not having NX SOUND capability.
• For SMF files, you can use the INFO button to switch the
displayed data.
DISK: Disk name
SONG: Song name
• For SMF files, use the MIDI OUT button to specify
whether or not MIDI data is output during playback
(ON/OFF). (This cannot be changed during playback.)
4. Press the START button.
Next song
Fast forward
Play/pause
Stop
Previous song
• During playback, the buttons below the display are used
for player functions such as fast forward, pause, etc.
• During playback, if you press the MIXER button you can
change the settings for each part.
• If you press the MIC button during playback, the display
changes to the MIC REVERB & EFFECT setting display.
• For SMF disks:
For “SMF with LYRICS” disks, by pressing the LYRICS
button, the lyrics are shown on the display.
For a “minus one” performance, use the TRACK MUTE
∧, ∨ buttons to select the channel you wish to mute. Use
the ON/OFF buttons and set the track you want to MUTE
to ON. Following this, you can play a keyboard performance on the channel which was last set to MUTE.
• For DOC disks:
You can use the CH 1, CH 2 and ORC (other accompaniment parts) buttons to set the respective parts to ON or
OFF.
• For PIANO DISC playback:
You can use the CH 1 and ORCH (other accompaniment
parts) buttons to set the respective parts to ON or OFF.
• The selected song is played back.
䡲 Adjusting the playback tempo
Even with a song having recorded tempo data,
you can use TEMPO/PROGRAM or TAP
TEMPO to adjust the tempo to your liking.
Disk Drive
• When the tempo is changed, all the tempo data of that
song is automatically changed by the same ratio. Accordingly, even in song data in which tempo change data is
stored, a single adjustment of the tempo produces a natural-sounding playback.
95
QQTG0701
10_Part V.fm 96 ページ
2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後8時41分
Part V
䡲 MEDLEY PLAY
With DIRECT PLAY, songs saved on a disk can
be played back continuously in a medley.
1. On the DIRECT PLAY display, set the MED-
Disk Drive
2. Press the START button.
• Medley playback begins.
• During medley playback, you can use the SKIP button to
skip to the next song.
LEY settings.
• If ALL is pressed, all the files are selected, and the songs
are played back in order in a medley. If ALL is pressed
again, the files are deselected.
• You can use the buttons below the display to select a
song to add to the song list, then press the ADD button to
add it to the list. Repeat these steps to create your own
list of songs to have played back. M01, M02 etc. next to
the file name indicates its order in the list.
• If the number of files is 10 or more, you can use the
PREV and NEXT buttons to go back or advance 10 files
at a time.
• You can delete a marked file from the medley song list by
selecting it and pressing the ADD button.
• Use the LOOP button to specify ON or OFF for repeat
playback of the medley.
Song Medley
Songs saved from the SEQUENCER to a disk (disk data) in the TECHNICS FORMAT can be played back
in a medley.
1. On the DISK MENU display, select SONG
MEDLEY from the display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Select the order of files in the medley.
Disk Drive
• If ALL is pressed, all the files are selected, and the songs
are played back in numerical in a medley.
• You can select a file and song, then press the ADD button to add it to the song list. Repeat these steps to create
your own list of songs to have played back. M01, M02
etc. next to the file name indicates its order in the list.
• You can delete a marked file from the medley song list by
selecting it and pressing the ADD button.
• Use the LOOP button to specify ON or OFF for repeat
playback of the medley.
• You can use the MODE button to select the medley
mode.
10 SNGS:
Songs 1 to 10 from each SONG are
played in a medley.
1 SONG:
Only song 1 from each SONG is played
back in a medley.
3. Press the START button.
• Medley playback begins.
• During the performance, the display changes to the playback display.
96
QQTG0701
• During a medley performance, if you press the MIXER
button you can change the settings for each part.
• During a medley performance, you can use the SKIP button to skip to the next song.
• If the disk contains SMF or other files, but no TECHNICS
FORMAT file, the display changes to the DIRECT PLAY
display.
10_Part V.fm 97 ページ
2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後8時41分
Part V
Disk Drive
Saving data
The recorded data and panel settings of this instrument can be saved on a disk.
䡲 TECHNICS FORMAT
Disks
You can use 3.5 inch 2DD (720KB) or 2HD
(1.44MB) disks.
• How to distinguish the two disk types:
2DD
No hole
2HD
1. Use the buttons below the display to specify
Hole
the file number you wish to save to.
• Although 2HD disks can hold more data and are convenient for quick loading and saving, some models may be
able to read only 2DD disks. Therefore, you may not be
able to use your 2HD disk data with other musical instrument models.
• When saving data to the disk, the write-protect tab must
be closed.
• The types of data that can be saved are shown in a frame
on the right side of the display. If you press the SAVE
button, all the indicated data is saved. Ordinarily PERFORMANCE data is selected, but you can use the SAVE
OPTION to select specific data to save.
2. If you wish to assign a name to the file, press
the NAME button.
Storage is not
possible
Storage is
possible
Open
• The display looks similar to the following.
Closed
SAVE
1. Insert a formatted disk into the Disk Drive slot.
Push it all the way in until you hear a click.
• A disk which is used with this instrument for the first time
must first be formatted.
2. On the DISK MENU display, select SAVE.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Use the buttons below the display to assign a
name.
• Set the character input position with the POSITION buttons, select the characters with the alphanumeric buttons
and repeat name assignment.
• Press the INS button to enter a space at the cursor position.
• Press the DEL button to erase the character at the cursor
position.
• Press the CLR button to erase the entire name.
• Press the →← button to center the name.
4. Press the OK button.
• The display returns to the SAVE display.
5. Press the SAVE button.
3. Select the type of data save you want.
• The SAVE operation begins.
• If you attempt to save data to a file number in which data
is currently saved, the display changes to the confirmation display. Press the YES button to continue the SAVE
procedure, or press the NO button if you wish to cancel it.
Disk Drive
TECHNICS FORMAT:
Save this instrument’s data in the Technics
File format.
SMF FORMAT 0:
Save the SEQUENCER data in the “Standard MIDI File” format (FORMAT 0).
97
QQTG0701
10_Part V.fm 98 ページ
2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後8時41分
Part V
Disk Drive
<SAVE OPTION>
Specify the kind of data you wish to save to the
disk. To maximize effective use of disk memory
or to minimize the save time, select only the type
of data you wish to save.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to access the 2/3
SAVE OPTION display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
䡲 SMF FORMAT 0
This instrument’s SEQUENCER data can be
saved in the “Standard MIDI File” format (FORMAT 0) for use on other instruments.
• What you can save in the SMF format (FORMAT 0) is
ordinary performance data, such as note data. Data such
as chord and rhythm data, COMPOSER data, etc. is not
saved. If you wish to also save this special Technics
data, save the data in the Technics File format.
• If you use the APC TO SMF CONVERT function of the
SEQUENCER, you can convert the patterns of the automatic accompaniment, etc. to SMF data. (Refer to page
78.)
2. Use the buttons below the display to specify
the types of data you wish to save (YES/NO).
• For PANEL MEMORY, select from NO/1 BANK/ALL.
Selecting 1 BANK will save only bank A.
1. To overwrite a file, use the ▲ and ▼ buttons
• Press the PERFORM button to select all the performance
data, or press the BACKUP button to select all the back
up data at once.
• If the ALL OFF button is pressed, all the settings change
to NO.
2. If you wish to assign a name to the file, press
3. Press the SAVE button.
the NAME button.
• The SAVE operation begins.
<SEQUENCER SONG SAVE>
You can specify a single song
SEQUENCER to save to the disk.
and then select a song name.
• If the number of files is 10 or more, you can use the
PREV and NEXT buttons to go back or advance 10 files
at a time.
3. Use the buttons below the display to assign a
in
the
1. Use the PAGE buttons to access the 3/3
SEQUENCER SONG SAVE display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
name.
4. Press the OK button.
• The display returns to the SAVE display.
5. Use the FROM SONG buttons to select the
SEQUENCER song number you wish to save.
• The song name to save from is shown below the FROM
SONG button.
6. Use the PANEL HEADER buttons to specify
ON or OFF.
2. Use the buttons below the display to select the
song number you wish to save.
3. Press the SAVE button.
ON:
The sound and volume settings for each
part are saved as data at the beginning of
the file.
OFF:
This data is not saved.
• The SAVE operation begins.
7. Use the 1 MEASURE SPACE buttons to
select ON or OFF.
Disk Drive
ON:
A one-measure space is added to the
beginning of the file.
OFF:
No space is added.
• When there is various data other than performance data
stored at the beginning of a file, the start of playback may
be delayed. This can be avoided by set the 1 MEASURE
SPACE to ON to inserting a before the beginning of the
performance.
98
QQTG0701
10_Part V.fm 99 ページ
2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後8時41分
Part V
• When set to ON, a space is added each time a file is
saved. Therefore, if you have already saved a file once
with the 1 MEASURE SPACE set to ON, please set it to
OFF each time the file is subsequently saved.
8. Use the SAVE AS button to select the sound
generator mode (GM/GM2/NX).
Disk Drive
9. Press the SAVE button.
• The SAVE operation begins.
• When the operation has been successfully completed,
“COMPLETED!” is shown on the display.
• If you attempt to save data to a file name in which data is
currently saved, the display changes to the confirmation
display. Press the YES button to continue the SAVE procedure, or press the NO button if you wish to cancel it.
Disk management
Various disk management procedures, such as file delete, file copy, and disk format, are available from
the DISK TOOLS menu.
DISK TOOLS
1. Insert the disk into the Disk Drive slot.
2. On the DISK MENU display, select DISK
TOOLS from the display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
FORMAT display appears. Follow the instructions shown to format the disk.
• Note that this procedure clears any data which is currently stored on the disk.
1. Select the type of format (2DD or 2HD).
• Be sure to select the type which is the same as your disk
type.
• If the type is automatically detected, the display changes
directly to the following display, without showing the type
select display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Select a function and follow the procedure to
execute it.
• Use the buttons below the display to select a file.
• You can press the SMF/TECH button to change to the
display for procedures related to SMF/TECH files.
• Use the buttons to the left and right of the display to
access the corresponding setting display.
䡲 RENAME:
Assign a name to a file.
䡲 DEL:
Delete a file.
䡲 COPY (TECH):
Copy a file.
• If you wish to select the type again, use the PAGE button
to access the PAGE 2/2 display.
2. Press the YES button to format the disk, or
press the NO button to cancel the format.
• When the YES button is pressed, disk format begins.
After about 1–2 minutes, formatting is completed and
DISK NAMING display is shown.
3. Use the buttons below the display to assign a
Replace a file.
䡲 INFO (DISK/SONG) (SMF files only):
Select whether to display the disk data or the
song names.
䡲 FORMAT
Disks which are used for the first time with this
instrument have to be formatted through the following procedure. When an unformatted disk is
inserted into the Disk Drive slot and you attempt
to execute the save or load procedure, the DISK
• Set the character input position with the POSITION buttons, select the characters with the alphanumeric buttons
and repeat name assignment.
• Press the INS button to enter a space at the cursor position.
• Press the DEL button to erase the character at the cursor
position.
• Press the CLR button to erase the entire name.
• Press the →← button to center the name.
4. Press the OK button.
99
QQTG0701
Disk Drive
name.
䡲 MOVE (TECH):
10_Part V.fm 100 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後8時41分
Part V
Disk Drive
Set the automatic display when a disk is
inserted
When a disk is inserted in the Disk Drive, the display automatically changes to a disk-procedure display.
Follow this procedure to customize the automatic display.
PREFERENCES
1. On the DISK MENU display, select PREFERENCES.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select the item, and the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
change the setting.
DISK INSERT OPTION:
The display automatically changes to a diskprocedure display when a disk is inserted in
the Disk Drive (OFF, DISK MENU, LOAD,
DIRECT PLAY, SONG MEDLEY).
• During playback, recording or changing the settings, the
displays unrelated to the settings made here do not
change.
FILE TYPE PRIORITY:
Specify the desired priority ranking of displayed files when several types of files are
recorded on one disk (TECHNICS/SMF).
Disk Drive
3. Press the OK button.
100
QQTG0701
11_Part VI.fm 101 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午前8時15分
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
Sound
Part VI Sound
Outline of the Sound
SEQUENCER
SAX &
ORGAN &
GUITAR &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
VARIATION
3
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
The SOUND mode is used for making fine adjustments to the functions related to sound, such as tone,
and tuning.
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
4. Follow the procedures on the corresponding
menu display.
PROGRAM
MENUS
• When the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit, it indicates
that the TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting the
current function.
5. When you have finished setting the functions,
• The display looks similar to the following.
press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
off.
䡲 A word about parts
The organization of the sound parts is as follows.
Normal parts:
RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT, PART 1 to 16
• It is suggested that PART 10 be used for the DRUMS
part.
2. Select SOUND.
• The display looks similar to the following.
AUTO PLAY CHORD (automatic accompaniment) parts:
ACCOMP 1–5, BASS, DRUMS 1, 2, CHORD,
R.BASS.
3. Select the desired menu.
Summary of the SOUND menu items
PART SETTING (page 102)
Set the various sound attributes for each
part.
TECHNI-CHORD
Select the TECHNI-CHORD harmony style.
(Refer to page 40.)
MIXER (page 104)
Use the MIXER display to visually adjust
the major settings of each part.
APC REVERB SETTING (page 107)
Adjust the degree of REVERB for each
automatic accompaniment part.
MASTER TUNING (page 106)
Select the type of tuning for the instrument.
SOUND ARRANGER
The SOUND ARRANGER feature lets you
select other sounds for the AUTO PLAY
CHORD parts of each rhythm.
(Refer to page 49.)
KEY SCALING (page 106)
Select the type of scaling (tuning).
SOUND LOAD OPTION (page 107)
Specify whether the various data accompanying a sound, such as effects, are used
when the sound is recalled.
101
QQTG0701
11_Part VI.fm 102 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時44分
Sound
Part VI
Sound
Part Setting
Set the various sound attributes for each part.
3. Use the buttons below the display to adjust
each attribute (explained in detail following).
Selecting an attribute
• The settings display is comprised of 5 pages. Use the
PAGE buttons to switch pages.
1. On the SOUND MENU display, select PART
SETTING.
2. Use the PART SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to
select the part.
4. When you have completed adjusting all of the
settings for one part, select another part and
repeat the adjustment procedure as desired.
• The settings and effects of the PAN, EFFECT etc. may
differ depending on the sound.
<PAGE 1>
TUNING:
Use the TUNE ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the fine
tuning (−128 to +127).
• The ∨ button is used to lower the pitch, and the
to raise the pitch.
∧ button
<PAGE 2>
SOUND:
Use the SOUND ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a
sound.
• The buttons on the control panel may also be used to
select a sound.
VOLUME:
Use the VOL ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the volume (0 to 127).
REVERB DEPTH:
Use the REVERB ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the
depth of the REVERB (0 to 127).
PAN:
Use the PAN ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the stereo balance (L64–CENTER(CTR)–R63).
DIGITAL EFFECT:
Use the DIG. EFFECT ON/OFF buttons to set
the DIGITAL EFFECT to on or off.
• At L64, the sound is completely to the left, at R63 completely to the right. At CENTER, the sound is at the center. The display indicates the selected position.
• Even at the same numerical value, the stereo balance
may differ slightly depending on the sound.
CHORUS:
Use the CHORUS ON/OFF button to set the
CHORUS to on or off. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons
to adjust the depth of the effect (0 to 127).
SUS PEDAL:
Use the SUSTAIN ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the
length of the sustain (1-8). Use the ON/OFF buttons to enable or disable the sustain effect, when
the sustain pedal is depressed.
MULTI:
Use the MULTI ON/OFF button to set the MULTI
EFFECT to on or off. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
adjust the depth of the effect (0 to 127).
KEY SHIFT:
Use the KEY ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
amount of key shift (−24 to +24).
<PAGE 3>
• A value of 1 means a shift of one semi-tone. To raise (or
lower) the pitch one octave, set the value to +12 (or −12).
• The ∨ button is used to lower the pitch, and the ∧ button
to raise the pitch.
102
QQTG0701
11_Part VI.fm 103 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時44分
Part VI
<PAGE 5>
Sound
EQ LOW:
Use the EQ LOW FC, GAIN ∧ and ∨ buttons to
adjust the sound quality in the lower range.
Sound
EQ HIGH:
Use the EQ HIGH FC, GAIN ∧ and ∨ buttons to
adjust the sound quality in the upper range.
GLIDE PEDAL:
Use the GLIDE ON/OFF buttons to enable or disable the glide effect, if it has been assigned to
the pedal.
• For pedal settings, refer to page 120.
ORIGINAL TUNING:
Use the ORIG ON/OFF button to enable or disable the tuning for each sound.
• For details about ORIGINAL TUNING, refer to page 106.
<PAGE 4>
MONO/POLY MODE:
Use the MONO/POLY ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
the output mode.
PORTAMENTO:
Use the PORTAMENTO ON/OFF buttons to
enable or disable the portamento function. (Portamento is a continuous gliding movement from
one tone to another.)
Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the portamento time.
• PORTAMENTO does not function for the POLY MODE.
MODULATION SENSITIVITY:
Use the MOD SENS ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust
the sensitivity of the MODULATION (when MIDI
data is recieved).
• Use the MSB ∧ and ∨ buttons (half-tone increments)
and the LSB ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the setting.
FILTER RESONANCE:
Use the RESO ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the
amount of resonance (0 to 127).
ATTACK TIME:
Use the ATT ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
attack time (0 to 127).
BEND RANGE:
Use the BEND RANGE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the PITCH BEND range (0 to 12). Increments
are in semi-tones.
• The higher the number, the greater the change in pitch
when PITCH BEND data is received as MIDI data.
DECAY TIME:
Use the DEC ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
decay time (0 to 127).
RELEASE TIME:
Use the REL ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
release time (0 to 127).
BRIGHTNESS:
Use the BRI ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the brightness of the sound (0 to 127).
VIBRATO RATE:
Use the RATE ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
vibrato speed (0 to 127).
VIBRATO DEPTH:
Use the DEP ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
vibrato depth (0 to 127).
VIBRATO DELAY:
Use the DEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the time
interval from when the keys are played until the
vibrato starts (0 to 127).
• The center value is 64 (±0).
103
QQTG0701
11_Part VI.fm 104 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時44分
Sound
Part VI
Sound
Mixer
Use the MIXER display to visually adjust the major settings of each part. Use this display to make broad,
general changes to the settings.
1. On the SOUND MENU display, select MIXER.
• The MIXER display consists of 5 pages. Use the PAGE
buttons to switch among the pages.
• Each time the OTHER PARTS/TR button is pressed, the
part that is displayed changes.
• Even at the same numerical value, the PAN and effects
may differ depending on the sound.
• For some parts, such as the automatic accompaniment
parts, the items that can be adjusted are limited.
2. Adjust each parameter.
MULTI:
Select MULTI. Use the buttons below the display to set the MULTI EFFECT to ON or OFF
for each part.
MULTI DEPTH:
Select MULTI DEPTH. Use the buttons below
the display to adjust the depth of the MULTI
EFFECT for the corresponding part (0 to 127).
<PAGE 1>
<PAGE 3>
SOUND:
Select SOUND. Use the buttons below the
display to set the sound for the corresponding
part.
DIGITAL EFFECT:
Select DIGITAL EFF. Use the buttons below
the display to set the DIGITAL EFFECT to ON
or OFF for the corresponding part.
• The buttons in the SOUND GROUP can also be used to
select the sound.
PAN:
Select PAN. Use the buttons below the display
to adjust the stereo balance of the corresponding part (L64–CTR–R63).
VOLUME:
Select VOLUME. Use the buttons below the
display to adjust the volume of the corresponding part (0 to 127).
• To mute a part, press both the corresponding balance
buttons as the same time. To cancel the mute, press
either balance button for the part.
CHORUS:
Select CHORUS. Use the buttons below the
display to set the CHORUS to ON or OFF for
each part.
CHORUS DEPTH:
Select CHORUS DEPTH. Use the buttons
below the display to set the depth of the CHORUS for the corresponding part (0 to 127).
<PAGE 4>
<PAGE 2>
REVERB:
Select REVERB. Use the buttons below the
display to set the level of the REVERB for the
corresponding part (0 to 127).
104
QQTG0701
EQUALIZER HIGH:
Sound quality correction in the high range.
Select EQUALIZER HI FC; use the buttons
below the display to set the standard frequency. Select EQUALIZER HI GAIN; use the
buttons below the display to set the ratio of
change.
11_Part VI.fm 105 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時44分
EQUALIZER LOW:
Sound quality correction in the low range.
Select EQUALIZER LOW FC; use the buttons
below the display to set the standard frequency. Select EQUALIZER LOW GAIN; use
the buttons below the display to set the ratio of
change.
<PAGE 5>
Sound
VIBRATO RATE:
Select VIBRATO RATE. Use the buttons
below the display to adjust the vibrato speed
for each part (0 to 127).
VIBRATO DEPTH:
Select VIBRATO DEPTH. Use the buttons
below the display to adjust the vibrato depth
for each part (0 to 127).
VIBRATO DELAY:
Select VIBRATO DELAY. Use the buttons
below the display to specify the time interval
from when the keys are played until the vibrato
starts for each part (0 to 127).
KEY SHIFT:
Select KEY SHIFT. Use the buttons below the
display to adjust the shift width of the output
pitch of each part (in semitone increments;
–24 to +24).
FILTER RESONANCE:
Select FILTER RESONANCE. Use the buttons below the display to set the amount of
resonance applied to each part (0 to 127).
<PAGE 2>
MIDI CHANNEL:
Select MIDI CHANNEL. Use the balance buttons below the display to set the MIDI channel
for each part (OFF, CH1–CH16).
• Information about MIDI channels can be found on page
127.
LOCAL CONTROL:
Select LOCAL CONTROL. Use the balance
buttons below the display to turn LOCAL
CONTROL ON or OFF for each part.
BRIGHTNESS:
Select BRIGHTNESS. Use the buttons below
the display to set the amount of brightness
applied to each part (0 to 127).
䡲 EDIT MIXER
If you press the EDIT MIXER button on the
PAGE 5/5 display, the display changes the setting display to modify the sounds.
ATTACK TIME:
Select ATTACK TIME. Use the buttons below
the display to set the sound attack time for
each part (0 to 127).
<PAGE 1>
DECAY TIME:
Select DECAY TIME. Use the buttons below
the display to set the sound decay time for
each part (0 to 127).
RELEASE TIME:
Select RELEASE TIME. Use the buttons
below the display to set the release time for
each part (0 to 127).
105
QQTG0701
Sound
Part VI
11_Part VI.fm 106 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時44分
Sound
Part VI
Sound
Master Tuning
This setting is used to fine-tune the pitch of the entire instrument. This is convenient when this instrument
is played with other instruments or with a recorded performance.
1. On the SOUND MENU display, select
MASTER TUNING.
• The display changes to the following.
2. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the pitch.
Key Scaling
For each part you can change the tuning of each key within a one-octave range. In addition to equal temperament tuning, you can perform in other types of scales, for example Arabic tuning.
1. On the SOUND MENU display, select KEY
SCALING.
• The display looks similar to the following.
7. Press the SET button.
• The OCTAVE TUNING for the specified type and key is
automatically set.
■ Settings for each key.
On the KEY SCALING display, you can adjust
the tuning for each key.
After selecting a key with the KEY SELECT 䊴
and 䊳 buttons, the pitch can be adjusted using
the TUNING ∧ and ∨ buttons.
2. Press the OCTAVE TUNING TEMPLATE button.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Use the PART ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
part to set.
• If ALL is selected, all the parts are set at once.
4. Use the TYPE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
type of tuning.
• Select from FLAT, WERCKMEISTER, KIRNBERGER,
ARABIC 1 to 5, SLENDRO, and PELOG.
5. Use the SHIFT ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
key to perform in.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each part, as necessary.
106
QQTG0701
• The pitch can be raised or lowered by a maximum of one
half-tone.
• You can use the PART SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to
switch the part.
• Use the ALL PARTS INITIAL button to return all parts to
the flat tuning.
䡲 ORIGINAL tuning
Each instrument of each sound has its own original tuning data. This setting affects the tuning
curve that spans the entire keyboard. So, for
example, the acoustic piano-type sounds duplicate those of a real piano, in that the high notes
are tuned slightly higher and the low notes
slightly lower.
You can specify for each part whether this original tuning is enabled or not.
1. Use the PART SELECT ∧ and ∨ buttons to
select a part.
2. Use the ORIGINAL TUNING ON/OFF button
to select ON or OFF.
11_Part VI.fm 107 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午後1時44分
Sound
Sound Load Option
The data for each individual sound is set with the most suitable effect settings, etc., but in some cases
when switching from one sound to another and these settings are recalled, the setup is not the way you
want it. By using the SOUND LOAD OPTION, you can adjust the settings so that specific data is not
recalled.
1. On the SOUND MENU display, select SOUND
LOAD OPTION.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select an item.
Use the ∧ and ∨ button to set the filter to ON
or OFF.
APC Reverb Setting
Although an appropriate REVERB is applied for the automatic accompaniment parts depending on the
rhythms by default, you can adjust the REVERB level for each part.
1. On the SOUND MENU display, select APC
REVERB SETTING.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the PART ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the
part, the DEPTH ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the
value (PRESET IN RHYTHM, 0 – 127).
• PRESET IN RHYTHM is an optimal preset value for each
rhythm for use with the APC Reverb Setting.
107
QQTG0701
Sound
Part VI
12_Part VII.fm 108 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後9時5分
Part VII Reverb & Effect
Outline of the
Reverb & Effect
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
SAX &
ORGAN &
GUITAR &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
SET
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
DISK
IN USE
DISK
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
1
DEMO
METRONOME POP
MAX
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
3
2
VARIATION
4
LOAD
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
Reverb & Effect
In the REVERB & EFFECT mode, you can make detailed settings related to this instrument’s effects.
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
PROGRAM
MENUS
2. Select REVERB & EFFECT.
• The display looks similar to the following.
Summary of the REVERB & EFFECT
menu items
TONE CONTROL
Settings for the entire instrument’s final output sound quality.
REVERB:
REVERB type and detailed settings (page
38)
CHORUS:
CHORUS type and detailed settings (page
38)
MULTI:
MULTI EFFECT type and detailed settings
(page 37)
3. Select the desired menu.
4. Follow the procedures on the corresponding
menu display.
• When the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit, it indicates
that the TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting the
current function.
MIC REVERB & EFFECT:
Settings for the effects that are applied to
MIC. (page 39)
SOUND LOAD OPTION:
Specify whether the various data accompanying a sound, such as effects, are used
when the sound is recalled. (page 107)
5. When you have finished setting the functions,
press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
off.
MIXER:
Use the MIXER display to visually adjust
the major settings of each part. (page 104)
Tone Control
Settings for the entire instrument’s final output sound quality.
1. On the REVERB & EFFECT display, select
TONE CONTROL.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the BASS ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the
low range and the TREBLE ∧ and ∨ buttons
for the high range.
• Raising the settings excessively may cause distorted
sounds. Lower the setting or the MAIN VOLUME.
108
QQTG0701
13_Part VIII.fm
109 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午前8時21分
Part VIII Sound Edit
Outline of the Sound Edit
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
SAX &
ORGAN &
GUITAR &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
VARIATION
3
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
SOUND EDIT enables you to create your own new sound by altering one of the this instrument’s preset
sounds. Your new sound can be stored in one of the sound memory locations. SOUND EDIT has two
methods of use. You can edit in detail using functions more commonly associated with a synthesizer, or
you can use EASY EDIT which allows you to change some basic parameters on one page.
2. Turn on the PROGRAM MENUS button.
PROGRAM
MENUS
• The display looks similar to the following.
Summary of the SOUND EDIT menu items
EASY EDIT (page 110)
The most often used edit functions—such
as brightness and attack speed—are
assembled on one display for easy sound
modification.
TONE (page 110)
Modify the tones which make up the sound.
PITCH (page 113)
Adjust the settings related to the pitch.
FILTER (page 114)
Adjust the amount of frequency cut in specific frequency ranges.
3. Select SOUND EDIT.
• The display looks similar to the following.
AMPLITUDE (page 116)
Volume settings.
LFO (page 117)
Cyclic modulation settings.
EFFECT (page 118)
Settings related to the various effects
applied to the sound.
4. Select the desired menu and follow the procedures on the corresponding setting display.
• To check the sound of a single tone, press the SOLO button to highlight the SOLO indication. Only the currently
selected tone sounds when a key is played.
• When the TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit, it indicates
that the TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting the
current function.
5. When the sound is just the way you like it, on
the SOUND EDIT MENU display press the
WRITE button to store your new sound.
• Press the EDITED (or ORIGINAL) button to switch
between the modified sound (EDITED) and the original
sound (ORIGINAL). This allows you to compare the
edited sound to the original sound as you are modifying
it.
CONTROLLER (page 118)
Specify how wheel operation etc. affects
the sound from MIDI.
• When DRUM KIT sounds are selected and the SOUND
EDIT is activated, the setting display looks different from
that for other sounds, but the basic operation is the same.
(To specify the percussion instrument you wish to edit,
use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the sound name, or
alternatively, while pressing the keyboard key for the corresponding sound, press the NOTE SELECT button.)
• To edit the DIGITAL DRAWBAR settings, first adjust the
settings, then enter the SOUND EDIT mode, press the
WRITE button and follow the procedure on the display.
109
QQTG0701
Sound Edit
1. Select a sound to edit.
13_Part VIII.fm
110 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午前8時21分
Part VIII
Sound Edit
Easy Edit
The most commonly used edit functions are consolidated on one display, providing convenient and quick
editing operation.
1. On the SOUND EDIT menu display, select
EASY EDIT.
• The display changes to the following.
Easy Edit items
BRILLIANCE:
Adjust the brightness of the sound.
VIBRATO DEPTH:
Set vibrato depth.
VIBRATO SPEED:
Set vibrato speed.
Sound Edit
2. Use the buttons below the display to specify
the value of the attribute.
• An effect may remain unchanged when EASY EDIT is
used to set the value.
3. Press the WRITE button to store your new
sound.
• Storing your new sound is explained on page 119.
• If a sound is stored in the EASY EDIT mode, and is later
selected in the EASY EDIT mode, the displayed value of
an attribute may be different from the value when it was
stored. The sound itself, however, is exactly as it was
stored.
Tone Edit
Modify the separate tones which comprise the sound.
About tones
A sound may be made up of at most four tones.
1st tone
2nd tone
SOUND
3rd tone
4th tone
110
QQTG0701
VIBRATO DELAY:
Set time delay between key played and
vibrato start.
OCT SHIFT:
Shift the octave range.
ATTACK:
Adjust attack time.
RELEASE:
Adjust time of sound fade-out after key is
released.
13_Part VIII.fm
111 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午前8時21分
Part VIII
TONE SELECT
1. On the SOUND EDIT menu, select TONE.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting item and
then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection.
• Select ON/OFF and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
ON or OFF.
Sound Edit
LEGATO:
Sound is emitted only when the key is played
legato.
NON LEG:
Sound is not emitted when the key is played
legato.
PEDAL:
The sound is produced only while the SUSTAIN button is on.
select the tone you wish to edit (1st, 2nd, 3rd,
4th).
3. Select a sound for the tone.
• Select GROUP and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
the group, and select TONE NAME and use the ∧ and ∨
buttons to select the sound.
• A “∗” mark in the DYNAMICS column indicates that a
TONE DYNAMICS change was made to the sound.
4. Select LEVEL and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
adjust the volume.
5. Select KEY and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to set
the pitch of the output sound.
6. Select DETUNE and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons
for fine adjustment of the pitch deviation.
䡲 TONE COPY
You can copy the tone of a particular sound to a
specified tone in the sound you are editing.
1. On the 1/4 display, press the TONE COPY
button.
2. Use the FROM ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
tone to copy from.
• Use the OPTION
wish to copy.
∧ and ∨ buttons to select the item you
3. Use the TO ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the tone
you wish to copy to.
4. Press the OK button.
• Tone copy is executed.
7. Select PANNING MODE and use the ∧ and ∨
buttons to select mode. (NORMAL, RANDOM,
STEREO R, STEREO L)
KEY LAYER
• If RANDOM, STEREO R or STEREO L is selected for the
MODE, the balance is fixed (cannot be moved).
Adjust the relation of tone output to keyboard
location.
8. Select PAN and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/4 display.
adjust the stereo balance.
• CTR is the center point. At L64, the sound is all the way
to the left, at R63 all the way to the right.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting item and
then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection.
9. Select DELAY and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
adjust the delay time of the sound.
• The higher the number, the longer the delay before
sound output.
10. Select TRIGGER and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a trigger mode.
KEY ON:
The normal mode, in which sound is emitted
when the key is played.
KEY OFF:
Sound is emitted when the key is released
(like muted strings, for example).
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone (1st, 2nd, 3rd or 4th).
3. Select L-FADE and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons
and select LOW and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons
to define the area of the lower range of tone
output.
• By entering different values for the L-FADE and LOW settings, you can define a sloping volume increase to the
peak output volume which corresponds to the note pitch.
111
QQTG0701
Sound Edit
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
CHORD:
The sound is emphasized when chords are
played (like the cutting sound of a guitar, for
example).
13_Part VIII.fm
112 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午前8時21分
Part VIII
Sound Edit
4. Select HIGH and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons and
select H-FADE and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
define the area of the higher range of tone output.
• By entering different values for the H-FADE and HIGH
settings, you can define a sloping volume decrease from
the peak output which corresponds to the note pitch.
• By overlapping the L-FADE and H-FADE curves of each
different tone, you can achieve a cross-fade effect, where
the sound gradually changes in relation to pitch.
TONE DYNAMICS
You can adjust the settings so that a different
sound (tone) is output for each tone depending
on the velocity (how hard the keys are played).
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 4/4 display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the other tones, as
desired.
Sound Edit
VELOCITY LAYER
Adjust these settings to regulate the tone output
relative to the velocity.
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 3/4 display.
3. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the column
• The display looks similar to the following.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting item and
then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection.
select a tone.
for the function you wish to adjust.
4. Select the tone waveform.
• Use the GR ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the sound group.
Use the TONE WAVEFORM ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
the waveform.
5. Use the LEV ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the volume. Use the FLT ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the
sound.
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone (1st, 2nd, 3rd or 4th).
3. Select L-FADE and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons
and select LOW and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons
to define the
lower range.
pp
sound output area for the
4. Select HIGH and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons and
select H-FADE and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
define the ff sound output area for the higher
range.
• By overlapping the L-FADE and H-FADE curves of each
different tone, you can change the way the tone sounds
relative to how hard or softly the keyboard is played.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the other tones, as
desired.
112
QQTG0701
6. Use the VELOCITY ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify
the velocity range.
• When the upper limit of a waveform is set to 127, no
more waveforms can be added.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 to edit the other waveforms, as desired.
8. Repeat steps 2 to 7 for the other tones, as
desired.
13_Part VIII.fm
113 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午前8時21分
Part VIII
Sound Edit
Pitch Edit
Adjust the settings related to the pitch of the sound.
KEY SHIFT & DETUNE
1. On the SOUND EDIT menu display, select
PITCH.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting item and
then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection.
• Select ON/OFF and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
ON or OFF.
3. Adjust the settings for the pitch change envelope.
• Use the buttons below the display to set the corresponding values. The envelope is created on the display as you
input the settings.
• Select TOTAL DEPTH and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the maximum level.
• Select START PITCH and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
set the start point. Select STOP PITCH and use the ∧
and ∨ buttons to set the stop point.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other tones, as
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone (1st, 2nd, 3rd or 4th).
3. Select KEY SHIFT and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the output pitch.
• Units are in semitones.
4. Select DETUNE and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons
PITCH ENVELOPE TOUCH & KEY
FOLLOW
Specify how the pitch envelope changes in relation to note pitch.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 3/3 display.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting item and
then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection.
to fine-adjust the pitch.
• Slight differences in the DETUNE values between the
tones add fullness to the sound.
5. Select TONE SCALE and use the ∧ and ∨
buttons to select the type of scale (NORMAL,
1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64, FIX).
• NORMAL is the normal scale type. For example, when
1/2 is selected, a difference in pitch between one key and
the adjacent key becomes half the normal pitch difference. When FIX is selected, the pitch is the same regardless of which key is played.
2. Use the buttons to left of the display to select a
tone.
3. Use the TOUCH ∧ and ∨ buttons to change
the respective touch settings.
PITCH ENVELOPE
Specify how the pitch changes over time, from
the time the key is played to the time the sound
dies out.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/3 display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting item and
then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection.
• Select TIME and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
time change depending on touch. Select LEVEL and use
the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the pitch change level
depending on touch.
• At a − setting, the softer the keys are pressed, the greater
the change. At a + setting, the harder the keys are
pressed, the greater the change.
4. Change the key follow settings for the
ATTACK, DECAY and RELEASE.
• Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons corresponding to the ENVELOPE KEY FOLLOW attributes to adjust the settings.
Select CENTER and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
the center of the bend direction.
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone.
113
QQTG0701
Sound Edit
desired.
13_Part VIII.fm
114 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午前8時21分
Part VIII
Sound Edit
Filter Edit
Make major changes to the sound by eliminating specific frequency ranges.
FILTER & EQUALIZER
1. On the SOUND EDIT menu, select FILTER.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting item and
then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection.
• Select ON/OFF and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
ON or OFF.
<Equalizer>
For LPF(6)+EQ/HPF(6)+EQ filters, the sound
quality can be modified by the EQUALIZER.
RANGE
Select the setting range (HIGH or LOW).
Sound Edit
FREQUENCY
Set the standard frequency.
GAIN
Set the level increase or decrease from the
value set for FREQ (dB).
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone.
3. Select MODE and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
select the filter mode.
LPF(6)+EQ (low-pass filter + equalizer)
Signals higher than the cut-off frequency are
cut. Normal sounds are softened.
HPF(6)+EQ (high-pass filter + equalizer)
Signals lower than the cut-off frequency are
cut. Normal sounds are sharpened.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for each tone, as desired.
TOUCH & KEY FOLLOW
Adjust how the filter is applied relative to touch
and pitch.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/4 display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting item and
then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection.
LPF24 (low-pass filter 24)
A stronger low-pass filter than LPF+EQ.
HPF24 (high-pass filter 24)
A stronger high-pass filter than HPF+EQ.
BPF (band-pass filter)
Cuts off signals that are not within in the area
between the two specified CUTOFF frequencies.
• For this mode, adjust the settings on the EQUALIZER/FILTER side as well.
THRU
No filter effect is applied.
4. Use the CUTOFF ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the
frequency range which is cut by the filter.
5. Use the RESONANCE ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the resonance value (dB).
• Resonance is effect which adds character to the sound
by emphasizing the harmonic components of frequencies
close to the cut-off frequency.
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone.
3. Modify how the respective filters are applied
relative to key touch.
• Select TOUCH CUT OFF and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the amount of change in the cut-off frequency.
Select TOUCH CURVE and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the curve of change. Select TOUCH RESONANCE and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the
degree of change in the resonance value.
4. Modify how the respective filters are applied
relative to note pitch.
• Select KEY FOLLOW SLOPE and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the bend slope. Select KEY FOLLOW
RANGE (1–3) and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify
the pitch range.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the other tones, as
desired.
114
QQTG0701
115 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午前8時21分
Part VIII
FILTER ENVELOPE
Specify how the filter changes over time, from
the time the key is played to the time the sound
dies out.
1. Use the PAGE buttons view the 3/4 display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting item and
then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection.
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone.
3. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to modify the respective filter envelopes.
• Use the buttons below the display to adjust the respective
settings.
• You can select CUTOFF ADJUST and use the ∧ and ∨
buttons to set the total upper and lower settings, the
START POINT to set the start point, and the STOP
POINT to set the stop point.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other tones, as
desired.
Sound Edit
FILTER ENVELOPE TOUCH & KEY
FOLLOW
Specify how the filter envelope (curve) changes
relative to touch or note pitch.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 4/4 display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting item and
then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection.
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone.
3. Modify how the respective filter envelopes
change relative to touch.
• Select TOUCH TIME and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the time change, and select TOUCH LEVEL and
use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify the level, relative to
touch.
• At a − setting, the softer the keys are played, the greater
the change. At a + setting, the harder the keys are
played, the greater the change.
4. Select KEY FOLLOW and use the ∧ and ∨
buttons to modify how the respective filter
envelopes change relative to note pitch.
• Adjust the respective slopes for attack, decay and
release. Select CENTER and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the center of the bend slope by note name.
115
QQTG0701
Sound Edit
13_Part VIII.fm
13_Part VIII.fm
116 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午前8時21分
Part VIII
Sound Edit
Amplitude Edit
Adjust the settings related to the volume of the sound.
LEVEL
1. On the SOUND EDIT menu, select AMPLI-
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting item and
then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection.
TUDE.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting item and
then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection.
• Select ON/OFF and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
ON or OFF.
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone.
Sound Edit
3. Adjust the settings for the volume envelope.
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone.
• item and then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection.
3. Select LEVEL and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
select the volume.
4. Select TOUCH and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
set the amount of volume change in relation to
how hard the keyboard is played.
• At a − value, the softer the keyboard is played, the louder
the sound. At a + value, the harder the keyboard is
played, the louder the sound.
5. Select CURVE and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
select the type of volume curve depending on
touch.
6. Change the respective key follow settings.
• Select KEY FOLLOW SLOPE and use the ∧ and ∨ but-
• Use the buttons below the display to set the corresponding values. The envelope is created on the display as you
input the settings.
• Select SUSTAIN PEDAL and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
select the type of sustain.
LONG:
Extend the release time of the sound.
HOLD:
Maintain the key-pressed condition.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other tones, as
desired.
ENVELOPE TOUCH & KEY FOLLOW
Specify how the volume changes relative to
touch or note pitch over time.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 3/3 display.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting item and
then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection.
tons to adjust the bend slope. Select KEY FOLLOW
RANGE (1–3) and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify
the pitch range by note name.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 for the other tones, as
desired.
ENVELOPE
Specify how the volume changes over time, from
the time the key is played to the time the sound
dies out.
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/3 display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone.
3. Change the touch settings.
• Select TOUCH ATTACK and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the ATTACK time change depending on touch.
Select TOUCH DECAY and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify the DECAY time change depending on touch.
• At a − setting, the softer the keys are pressed, the greater
the change. At a + setting, the harder the keys are
pressed, the greater the change.
4. Change the key follow settings for the
ATTACK, DECAY and RELEASE.
• Select RANGE (1–3) and use the
specify the keyboard range.
116
QQTG0701
∧ and ∨ buttons
to
13_Part VIII.fm
117 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午前8時21分
Part VIII
Sound Edit
LFO Edit
LFO can be applied to the pitch, amplitude, filter and/or pan to produce a cyclic modulation of the sound.
•
Twelve LFO groups can be used.
LFO
LFO.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a setting item and
then the ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify a selection.
• Select ON/OFF and use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
ON or OFF.
2. Use the PAGE buttons to select the respective
characteristics.
PAGE 1/4: PITCH (vibrato effect)
PAGE 2/4: AMPLITUDE (tremolo effect)
PAGE 3/4: FILTER (wah-wah effect)
PAGE 4/4: PANNING (auto pan effect)
3. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a tone.
4. Adjust the respective assigned LFO’s.
• LFO which share the same number on other displays are
also changed with this adjustment.
SELECT
Select the assigned LFO number (1 to 12)
SPEED
Adjust the modulation speed.
6. Select TONE SETTINGS PHASE and use the
∧ and ∨ buttons to adjust the respective
parameters.
PHASE
Phase
• A + indicates normal phase, and a − indicates an inverted
phase.
WAVE
Modulate the waveform.
SINE: Sine wave
TRIANGLE: Triangle wave
SQUARE: Square wave
SAW TOOTH: Saw tooth wave
RANDOM: Irregular pattern
Sound Edit
1. On the SOUND EDIT MENU display, select
DELAY
Delay time is the time elapsed from when the
keyboard key is pressed until the modulation
begins.
DEPTH
Modulation depth
TOUCH
Degree of modulation change in relation to
touch
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 for the other tones, as
desired.
• You can press the OVERVIEW button to confirm the status of each LFO setting.
KEYSYNC
When playing more than one note, specify
whether the LFO starts or not each time a key
is pressed (ON/OFF).
• When KEYSYNC is set to ON: if, while playing one note,
you play a second note, the LFO is applied to the second
note as well.
PHASE
Degree of phase change.
5. Select CONNECTION and use the buttons to
specify whether or not the LFO is applied to
the tone.
• An arrow mark indicates that the LFO is applied.
117
QQTG0701
13_Part VIII.fm
118 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午前8時21分
Part VIII
Sound Edit
Effect Edit
These are settings related to the various effects applied to your edited sound.
EFFECT
1. On the SOUND EDIT menu display, select
EFFECT.
Sound Edit
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the CHORUS ON/OFF buttons set CHORUS to on or off. Use the respective DEPTH ∧
and ∨ buttons to specify how the CHORUS is
applied.
3. Use the REVERB ADJUST ∧ and ∨ buttons to
specify how the REVERB is applied.
4. Use the MONO/POLY ∧ and ∨ buttons to
select the sound output mode.
5. Use the PORTAMENTO ON/OFF buttons set
portamento to on or off. Use the TIME ∧ and ∨
buttons to set the portamento time.
• PORTAMENT does not function for the POLY.
䡲 DIGITAL EFFECT
1. Use the PAGE buttons to view the 2/2 display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• The display for the effect type which is best-suited for the
sound currently being edited is selected.
• The display is different by the MULTI EFFECT button on
or off.
2. Use the TYPE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the
type of effect.
<ON/OFF button>
Specify whether the DIGITAL EFFECT button
turns on or off when the sound is selected.
When set to ON, the DIGITAL EFFECT button
turns on automatically when the sound is
selected.
<STEREO/MONO button>
Select stereo (STEREO) or monaural (MONO)
output of the effect.
3. Use the buttons along the bottom of the display to select the attribute you wish to adjust.
• When the type is changed, the parameters revert to the
factory defaults.
Controller Edit
Specify how operation of the controllers, such as the wheels, etc., affects the sound.
•
These settings are effective when the instrument recieves controller MIDI data.
CONTROLLER
1. On the SOUND EDIT menu display, select
CONTROLLER.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• Two functions can be assigned to each controller.
3. Use the FUNCTION ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
a function for the controller.
4. Use the DEPTH∧ and ∨ buttons to set the
depth of the function applied by the controller.
5. Use the ON/OFF ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the
controller to on or off for each tone.
• When set to INV, the effect is applied inversely.
2. Use the buttons to the left of the display to
select a controller.
118
QQTG0701
13_Part VIII.fm
119 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午前8時21分
Part VIII
Sound Edit
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for the other controllers,
as desired.
7. Use the GLIDE ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
whether or not the glide effect is active.
ENABLE:
The glide effect is enabled.
DISABLE:
The glide effect is disabled.
The MEMORY button in the SOUND GROUP section accesses memory banks reserved for the sounds
you create with the SOUND EDIT. You can store up to 40 original sounds then select the sounds just like
the other sounds in the SOUND GROUP.
Procedure
1. When you have edited the sound to just the
way you like it, on the SOUND EDIT menu display press the WRITE button.
• The display changes to the MEMORY WRITE display.
4. When you have finished typing the name,
press the OK button.
• The display returns to the MEMORY WRITE display.
5. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the MEMORY number in which to store the new sound
(1–40).
6. Press the OK button.
• The new sound is stored, and “COMPLETED!” is shown
on the display.
• The SOUND EDIT mode is turned off.
2. To assign a name to your new sound, press
the SOUND NAMING button.
• If you do not assign a name to your sound, the name
becomes the same as the original sound from which you
started. In this case, skip to step 5.
• The display changes to the SOUND NAMING display.
• The stored sound memories can be saved on a disk for
recall at a later time. (Refer to page 97.)
Select a new sound
You can select your original sound just like the
other sounds in the SOUND GROUP.
1. In the SOUND GROUP section, press the
MEMORY button.
MEMORY
3. Use the buttons below the display to assign a
name.
• Set the character input position with the POSITION buttons, select the characters with the alphanumeric buttons
and repeat name assignment.
• Switch from upper to lower case letters with the ABC, abc
button.
• Use the !#$ button to switch to the symbols character set.
• Press the INS button to enter a space at the cursor position.
• Press the DEL button to erase the character at the cursor
position.
• Press the CLR button to erase the entire name.
• Press the →← button to center the name.
• The list of sounds is shown on the display.
2. Select the desired sound from the list on the
display.
119
QQTG0701
Sound Edit
Store the new sound
14_Part IX.fm 120 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時26分
Part IX Control
Outline of Control
functions
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
GUITAR &
SAX &
ORGAN &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
2
VARIATION
3
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
Various settings related to the operation of this instrument are adjusted with the CONTROL functions.
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
3. Select a function.
on.
PROGRAM
MENUS
INITIAL
Return the settings and memories to the
factory-preset status. (Refer to page 133.)
PEDAL SETTING
Various functions can be assigned to the soft
pedal.
• The display looks similar to the following.
Control
PANEL MEMORY MODE
Define which panel settings are stored when
the PANEL MEMORY is used. (Refer to page
53.)
2. Select CONTROL.
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER MODE
Define which panel settings change by pressing a FILL IN button when the MUSIC STYLE
ARRANGER is used. (Refer to page 51.)
• The display looks similar to the following.
FADE IN/OUT SETTING
Settings related to the FADE IN/FADE OUT.
(Refer to page 48.)
4. Follow the procedure to adjust the settings.
• While you are adjusting the settings, when the
TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit, it indicates that the
TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting the current
function.
5. When you have finished setting the functions,
press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
off.
Pedal Setting
By assigning one of the many programmable functions to the soft pedal, you can then control the function
during your performance just by pressing the pedal.
1. On the CONTROL MENU display, select
PEDAL SETTING.
120
QQTG0701
• The display looks similar to the following.
14_Part IX.fm 121 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後5時26分
Part IX
OFF:
No function is assigned.
SOFT PEDAL:
Soft pedal on/off
SOSTENUTO PEDAL*:
Sostenuto pedal on/off
P. MEM INCREMENT:
Increment the PANEL MEMORY number
selection by 1.
P. MEM DECREMENT:
Decrement the PANEL MEMORY number
selection by 1.
P. MEM BANK INC.:
Change to the next PANEL MEMORY bank in
order.
P. MEM BANK DEC.:
Change to the previous PANEL MEMORY
bank in order.
PANEL MEMORY 1 to 8:
The specified PANEL MEMORY number is
turned on.
P. MEM INC.+DEC.:
Press the pedal to increment the PANEL
MEMORY number selection by one; release
the pedal to return to the previous number.
START/STOP:
START/STOP button on/off
FILL IN 1:
FILL IN 1 button on
FILL IN 2:
FILL IN 2 button on
MULTI EFFECT:
MULTI EFFECT button on/off
ROTARY SLOW/FAST:
TREMOLO SLOW/FAST of the DIGITAL
DRAWBAR
MIC REVERB:
MIC REVERB on/off
MIC EFFECT:
MIC EFFECT on/off
PUNCH RECORD:
Punch in/Punch out (Refer to page 64.)
APC HOLD:
Memorize the chord specified for the automatic accompaniment.
FADE IN:
FADE IN button on/off
FADE OUT:
FADE OUT button on/off
TAP TEMPO:
TAP TEMPO button on
• If the PEDAL SETTING function in the DATA PROTECTION menu is set to OFF, the setting contents may
change during song playback, etc. If you do not wish the
setting contents to change, set PEDAL SETTING to ON.
(Refer to page 124.)
• In the PROGRESSIVE PIANIST mode, if you set TURN
PAGE to MANUAL, the LEFT PEDAL functions to turn
the display page.
* Sostenuto pedal
If this pedal is pressed while the keys are
pressed, the sustain effect is applied to those
notes only. If the pedal is pressed first and the
keys are then pressed, the sustain effect does
not work for those notes.
• For continuous-type sounds, such as ORGAN, the notes
sound as long as the pedal is pressed.
INTRO & ENDING 1:
INTRO & ENDING 1 button on
INTRO & ENDING 2:
INTRO & ENDING 2 button on
GLIDE:
Glide on/off (The glide effect “bends” the pitch
down by about one semitone.)
• This effect does not work for some sounds.
TECHNI-CHORD:
TECHNI-CHORD button on/off
DIGITAL EFFECT:
DIGITAL EFFECT button on/off
121
QQTG0701
Control
2. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select its function.
Control
15_Part X.fm 122 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後11時34分
Part X Customize
Outline of Customize functions
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
SOUND
SAX &
ORGAN &
GUITAR &
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
3
2
VARIATION
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
Many of this instrument’s settings can be customized for maximum playing convenience and ease.
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
• The display looks similar to the following.
DATA PROTECTION (page 124)
Specify when you don’t want the data to
change in cases where it normally does, for
instance during disk load and when automatic
settings are made, etc.
MIDI SETTING LOAD OPTION (page 124)
Specify how MIDI data is handled when data
is loaded from a disk.
2. Select CUSTOMIZE.
• The display looks similar to the following.
LANGUAGE SETTING
Select your preferred language for the displayed messages.
• The display is different, but the operation is the same as
for HELP (page 29).
DISK PREFERENCES
Automatic display when a floppy disk is
inserted (page 100).
4. Follow the procedure to adjust the settings.
Customize
3. Select a function.
FAVORITES SETTING
FAVORITES display settings (page 30)
DISPLAY TIME OUT (page 123)
Adjust settings related to the screen display.
122
QQTG0701
• While you are adjusting the settings, when the
TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit, it indicates that the
TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting the current
function.
5. When you have finished setting the functions,
press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
off.
15_Part X.fm 123 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後11時34分
Part X
Customize
Display Time Out
Numerous message displays and setting displays conveniently guide you through the operation steps of
this instrument. Once you become familiar with the operation of your instrument, however, you may wish
to shorten or even suspend the display time of the message displays.
1. On the CUSTOMIZE display, select DISPLAY
TIME OUT.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the DISPLAY TYPE ▲ and ▼ buttons to
select the function.
SAVE REMINDER:
Reminder display (OFF, DEFAULT, HOLD, 1
to 10 sec)
‘COMPLETED’ MESSAGE:
Operation successfully completed
DEFAULT, HOLD, 1 to 10 sec)
(OFF,
ARE YOU SURE?:
Display requires user action for confirmation
(OFF, DEFAULT, HOLD)
Customize
ERROR MESSAGE:
Error notification display (DEFAULT, HOLD, 1
to 10 sec)
SOUND/RHYTHM SELECT:
Sound/Rhythm selection display (DEFAULT,
HOLD, 1 to 10 sec)
EASY SETTING:
Display time when the setting display was
accessed pressing and holding a panel button
(DEFAULT, HOLD, 1 to 10 sec)
• When set the OFF, the display will not appear.
• When set to DEFAULT, the display time returns to the initialized setting.
• You can specify 1 to 10 seconds for the display time.
• When set to HOLD, the DISPLAY HOLD automatically
turns on.
3. Use the TIME ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the
setting.
4. Press the OK button.
• Some messages may be displayed even if they are set to
OFF.
123
QQTG0701
15_Part X.fm 124 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後11時34分
Part X
Customize
Data Protection
Data which you don’t want to change but which is normally overwritten during disk load, song change, or
the automatic setting functions, etc. can be protected from accidental overwriting.
1. In the CUSTOMIZE MENU display, select
3. Use the ON/OFF button to select ON or OFF.
DATA PROTECTION.
ON:
The data is protected and will not be
changed.
OFF:
The data is not retained.
• The display looks similar to the following.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each item.
2. Use the ITEM ∧ and ∨ buttons to select an
5. Press the OK button.
item.
MIDI Setting Load Option
Specify how MIDI data is handled when data is loaded from a disk.
1. On the CUSTOMIZE MENU display, select
MIDI SETTING LOAD OPTION.
• The display looks similar to the following.
䡲 Use these settings when:
GM2 mode ON:
Specify how the MIDI settings of this instrument are affected when GM2 is on.
Customize
• Select from INITIAL, (initialized settings), PRESET (MIDI
PRESETS), and KEEP (the settings do not change).
NX SOUND mode ON:
Specify how the MIDI settings of this instrument are affected when NX SOUND is ON.
2. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select an item.
䡲 Load MIDI Parameters?
From Registration file:
Specify whether MIDI data is also loaded
when panel data is loaded (NO/YES).
From Sequencer Song:
Specify whether MIDI data is loaded or
changed when SEQUENCER data is loaded
or when the SONG is changed by the
SEQUENCER SONG SELECT, SONG COPY
or TRACK ASSIGN (NO/YES).
• The MIDI settings are always stored at the start of each
recorded SEQUENCER SONG and when PANEL
WRITE is executed. In the initialized state, the MIDI settings are not loaded even when the SONG is changed.
However, changing this setting to YES will cause the
stored MIDI settings to also load in these cases.
124
QQTG0701
• Select from INITIAL, (initialized settings), PRESET (MIDI
PRESETS), and KEEP (the settings do not change).
3. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the setting.
4. Press the OK button.
16_Part XI.fm 125 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後11時40分
Part XI MIDI
What is MIDI?
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is the international standard for digital communication of electronic musical instrument data. This means that any equipment which has a MIDI terminal—such as electronic musical instruments and personal computers—can easily exchange digital data with other MIDI
equipment without resorting to complicated conversions or connections.
MIDI terminals
(On the rear panel)
IN:
The terminal by which this instrument receives
data from other equipment.
OUT:
The terminal that transmits data from this
instrument to other equipment.
MIDI
OUT
IN
• For these connections, use a commercially available
MIDI cable.
Connection examples
䡲 To generate sound from a connected instrument by playing this instrument
OUT
MIDI cable
This instrument
IN
Another MIDI instrument
䡲 To generate sound from this instrument by operating a connected instrument
IN
MIDI cable
This instrument
OUT
Another MIDI instrument
䡲 To connect with a MIDI sequencer
OUT
IN
MIDI cable
This instrument
OUT
IN
Another MIDI instrument
MIDI
MIDI channels
Many different kinds of performance data are
sent using just one MIDI cable. This is possible
because MIDI signals are sent and received
through 16 different “basic channels” (numbered
1 to 16). In order for the exchange of data to take
place, the channels on the transmission side
must match the channels on the receiving side.
This characteristic also makes it possible to link
multiple sound generators and to control each by
matching specific channels.
125
QQTG0701
16_Part XI.fm 127 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後11時40分
Part XI
MIDI
Summary of the MIDI menu items
PART SETTING
Set the MIDI CHANNEL, OCTAVE and
LOCAL CONTROL settings for each part.
CONTROL MESSAGES (page 128)
Enable or disable the exchange of various
CONTROL data.
REALTIME MESSAGES (page 128)
Enable or disable the exchange of REALTIME COMMANDS, and select the CLOCK
mode.
COMMON SETTING (page 129)
Set the functions which are common to all
parts.
MIDI PRESETS (page 131)
Establish the optimum settings depending
on how this instrument is connected to
other equipment.
• You can save the settings you specify yourself.
MODE SETTING (page 130)
NX SOUND and GM LEVEL 2 ON setting
COMPUTER CONNECTION (page 132)
Mode settings related to the flow of MIDI
signals when this instrument is connected
to a personal computer.
INPUT/OUTPUT SETTING (page 130)
Settings which determine how various performance data is treated during data transmission and reception.
Part Setting
Follow this procedure to set the functions which can be set for each part: MIDI CHANNELs, the OCTAVE
data to NOTE data during transmission, and LOCAL CONTROL (whether or not the sound generator of
this instrument is active during transmission).
SETTING.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the PART ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a
part.
• The list of parts covers 4 pages. Use the OTHER
PARTS/TR button or PAGE button to view different parts.
3. Use the CHANNEL ∧ and ∨ buttons to select
a MIDI CHANNEL for the part (OFF, 1 to 16).
• A part which has been set to OFF cannot be used to
transmit or receive MIDI data.
• The initialized settings are as follows:
RIGHT 1
RIGHT 2
LEFT
PART 1
PART 2
PART 3
PART 4
PART 5
PART 6
PART 7
PART 8
PART 9
PART 10
PART 11
PART 12
PART 13
PART 14
PART 15
PART 16
CONTROL
ACCOMP 1 – 5
BASS
DRUMS 1 – 2
CHORD
1
2
3
OFF
OFF
OFF
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
MIDI
1. On the MIDI MENU display, select PART
127
QQTG0701
16_Part XI.fm 128 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後11時40分
Part XI
4. Use the OCTAVE ∧ and ∨ buttons to set the
octave shift value (−3 to 3).
• Octave shift is set for transmitted data only; however the
transmitted and received octave shifts are linked. For
example, if the transmitted octave shift is set to 1, the
received octave shift is automatically set to −1.
MIDI
5. Use the LOCAL ∧ and ∨ buttons to enable or
disable this instrument’s sound generator.
• When set to ON, the performance from this instrument is
transmitted as MIDI data and also sounds from this
instrument. When set to OFF, the performance from this
instrument is transmitted as MIDI data but does not
sound from this instrument.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for each part as desired.
Control Messages
Enable or disable the exchange of various control data.
1. On the MIDI MENU display, select CONTROL
MESSAGES.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• The CONTROL MESSAGES display consists of 3 pages.
Use the PAGE buttons to switch between pages.
2. Use the MESSAGE ▲ and ▼ buttons to select
the control message.
3. Use the ON and OFF ∧ and ∨ buttons to specify on or off for the control message.
ON:
Data for the control operation is exchanged.
OFF:
Data for the control operation is not
exchanged.
• The BANK SELECT setting is effective only when PRG.
CHANGE is set to ON.
• The EFFECT & REVERB setting controls the DIGITAL
EFFECT, CHORUS, MULTI and REVERB on/off.
• RPN is the general term for KEY SHIFT, TUNING, PITCH
BEND RANGE and MODULATION SENSITIVITY.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each control as
desired.
Realtime Messages
Enable or disable the exchange of START/STOP data (REALTIME COMMANDS), and select the CLOCK
mode.
1. On the MIDI MENU display, select REALTIME
MESSAGES.
OFF:
This data cannot be transmitted/received.
MIDI
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the buttons on the left side of the display
to select a function.
3. Use the VALUE ∧ and ∨ buttons to change
the setting.
REALTIME COMMANDS
ON:
Rhythm and SEQUENCER start/stop, continue, and song position pointer data can be
transmitted/received.
128
QQTG0701
CLOCK
INTERNAL:
This instrument’s internal clock is used to
control the performance. The clock of the
connected equipment is disabled.
MIDI:
The clock of the connected equipment is
used to control the performance. This
instrument’s clock is disabled. (The tempo
is displayed as “q = − − −”.)
• The CLOCK is set to INTERNAL when the power to this
instrument is turned on.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other function if
desired.
16_Part XI.fm 129 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後11時40分
Part XI
MIDI
Common Setting
Set the functions which are common to all parts.
SETTING.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the item.
NOTE ONLY:
Of the performance data, specify whether or
not only note data is exchanged.
PROGRAM CHANGE TO P. MEM:
Enable or disable the exchange of program
change numbers for the RIGHT 1 part by
operation of the PANEL MEMORY buttons.
• For this setting, the PANEL MEMORY 1 to 8 program
change numbers correspond to the bank numbers as follows:
BANK A = 0 to 7
BANK B = 8 to 15 ...
INTRO, FILL IN, ENDING:
Enable or disable the exchange of intro, fill-in
and ending data.
APC CONTROL:
Enable the exchange of data for the on/off status of the AUTO PLAY CHORD’s BASIC,
ADVANCED and PIANIST modes.
FADE IN/OUT:
Specify whether or not FADE IN/OUT data is
exchanged.
PROGRAM CHANGE MODE
NX SOUND:
Program change numbers are standardized
among NX SOUND Technics models which
are set to this mode. The program change
number assigned to a given sound on one
model is assigned to the same sound on all
models which are set to the same mode.
PREVIOUS TECH:
Program change numbers are standardized
among non-NX SOUND Technics models
which are set to this mode. The program
change number assigned to a given sound
on one model is assigned to the same
sound on all models which are set to the
same mode.
MAP R:
GS basic sounds are transmitted and
received as GS program change numbers.
MAP Y:
XG basic sounds are transmitted and
received as XG program change numbers.
∗ GS is a trademark of Roland Corporation. XG is a
trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
DRUMS TYPE
NX SOUND:
Keyboard percussion instrument sounds
correspond to the same key note numbers
for connected NX SOUND Technics models
that are set to this type.
PREVIOUS TECH:
Keyboard percussion instrument sounds
correspond to the same key note numbers
for connected non-NX SOUND Technics
models that are set to this type.
SONG SELECT
ON:
Song number data can be exchanged.
OFF:
Song number data cannot be exchanged.
PREVIOUS MODEL MODE
ON:
INTRO, FILL IN, ENDING and APC CONTROL, FADE IN/OUT data are converted to
CONTROL CHANGE data for previous
models ∗ and then transmitted.
OFF:
The above settings are not converted.
∗ “Previous models” include all Technics instrument
models except for:
KN7000/6500/6000/2600/2400
PR604/804/603/703/903/1000
3. Use ∧ and ∨ buttons to change the setting.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other settings as
desired.
129
QQTG0701
MIDI
1. On the MIDI MENU display, select COMMON
16_Part XI.fm 130 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後11時40分
Part XI
MIDI
Mode Setting
Initialize the settings for when the NX SOUND or GM LEVEL 2 mode is ON.
1. On the MIDI MENU display, select MODE
SETTING.
2. Select the mode.
• There are two modes for GM LEVEL 2 depending on the
parts to use.
• The confirmation display appears. Press the YES button
to execute the function, or press the NO button to cancel
the function.
• The display looks similar to the following.
Input/output Setting
Make the settings which determine how various performance data is treated during data transmission and
reception.
1. On
the MIDI MENU display,
INPUT/OUTPUT SETTING.
select
• The display looks similar to the following.
•
•
•
Select VELOCITY OFFSET VALUE. Use the
∨ buttons to change the value.
∧ and
All the values are offset from the current value by the
fixed amount.
The upper (127) and lower (1) limits cannot be
exceeded.
FIX:
The VELOCITY value of all received NOTE
ON data is set to a fixed value. (1 to 127)
•
MIDI
2. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the item.
Select VELOCITY FIXED VALUE. Use the
buttons to change the value.
∧ and ∨
TECHNI-CHORD OUTPUT
ON: Keyboard notes generated by the
TECHNI-CHORD function are also transmitted.
OFF: Only key note data of the pressed keys
is transmitted.
RIGHT 1 INPUT
CONDUCTOR:
When data for the RIGHT 1 part is received,
the CONDUCTOR determines which part it
is used for.
DIRECT:
When data for the RIGHT 1 part is received,
it is treated as RIGHT 1 data, and performance data for all parts is received on their
respective basic channels.
TRANSPOSE OUTPUT
ON: The note data of the transposed notes is
transmitted.
OFF: The note data of the played keys is
transmitted.
AUTO PLAY CHORD INPUT
ON: Input data for the ACCOMP, BASS, APC
and CHORD parts is received.
OFF: Data for the above parts is not received.
DRUM PATTERN OUTPUT
ON: Data from the DRUMS part is transmitted.
OFF: Data from the DRUMS part is not transmitted.
• MIDI channels should be assigned to the above parts
before exchanging data.
VELOCITY INPUT
DIRECT:
The VELOCITY value of received NOTE
ON data is treated as is.
OFFSET:
The VELOCITY value of received NOTE
ON data is offset (−50 to 50).
130
QQTG0701
AUTO PLAY CHORD OUTPUT
ON: The data for the ACCOMP and BASS
parts is transmitted.
OFF: The data for the above parts is not transmitted.
• MIDI channels should be assigned to the above parts
before exchanging data.
16_Part XI.fm 131 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後11時40分
Part XI
MIDI
AUTO OCTAVE SHIFT OUTPUT
ON: If the octave has been automatically
changed, the data of the transposed notes
is transmitted, depending on the sound.
OFF: The note data of the played keys is
transmitted.
3. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select the setting.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each item as
desired.
MIDI Presets
Establish the optimum settings depending on how this instrument is connected to other equipment, and
on whether this instrument is used as the master or the slave.
1. On the MIDI MENU display, select MIDI PRESETS.
• The display looks similar to the following.
䡲 Storing user settings
After you change the MIDI settings, you can
store your customized settings in USER.
1. Adjust the various MIDI settings.
2. Go to PAGE 4/4 of the MIDI PRESETS display.
• The display looks similar to the following.
2. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the connection setup.
3. Press the OK button.
• When the settings have been successfully stored, “COMPLETED!” appears on the display.
Notice
When an instrument such as an organ or
accordion with separate or divided keyboards
dedicated to melody and chords is used as the
master instrument, if this instrument’s split
point is set to a note below the lowest note of
the melody keyboard of the master instrument,
it is possible to produce melody notes on multiple parts by this instrument’s CONDUCTOR
settings.
3. Use the WITH SPLIT POINT? button to specify whether or not to also store the keyboard
split point (YES/NO).
4. Press the WRITE button.
䡲 Recalling the USER settings
1. Go to PAGE 3/4 of the MIDI PRESETS display.
MIDI
• The PAGE 1/4 display shows connection setups with this
instrument as the SLAVE. And the PAGE 2/4 display
shows connection setups with this instrument as the
MASTER.
• The MASTER is the instrument used to transmit data,
and the SLAVE is the instrument used to receive the
data.
• Use the buttons below the display to select WITHOUT
APC (the AUTO PLAY CHORD is not used) or WITH
APC (the performance includes AUTO PLAY CHORD).
2. Press the OK button.
• Assign the RIGHT 1 channel as the CHANNEL for the
melody keyboard. Assign the CHORD channel (or if
you also wish the played note to be produced,
CHORD + LEFT) as the CHANNEL for the chord keyboard.
• You will also have to specify CONDUCTOR as the
RIGHT 1 INPUT for the INPUT/OUTPUT SETTING.
131
QQTG0701
16_Part XI.fm 132 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後11時40分
Part XI
MIDI
Computer Connection
These settings are used to select the mode related to MIDI signal flow when a personal computer is connected to the USB terminal of this instrument.
•
When connecting to a personal computer, install the USB driver on the included CD-ROM to the computer first. (Refer to the
separate manual for more information.)
1. Turn off the power to this instrument.
2. Connect a personal computer to the USB terminal on the rear of this instrument.
3. Turn on the power to this instrument.
4. On the MIDI MENU display, select COMPUTER CONNECTION.
• The display looks similar to the following.
5. Use the ∧ and ∨ buttons to select a mode.
NORMAL:
Ordinary mode
PC as master:
The mode which is appropriate for data transmission
PR as master:
The mode when this instrument is used as the
master keyboard.
MIDI
PR as slave:
The mode when this instrument is used as a
slave instrument.
INTERFACE:
The mode when this instrument is used as a
connecting device between a PC with only
USB terminals and an instrument with only
MIDI terminals.
132
QQTG0701
17_Initialize.fm 133 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午前11時37分
Initialize
This instrument has many settable functions and storable memories. However, you can return the settings
and memory to the factory-preset status.
INITIAL
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
on.
4. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the desired
type of initialization.
PROGRAM
MENUS
• PERFORMANCE includes all the items which are listed
below it.
5. Press the OK button.
• The display changes to the confirmation display. Press
the YES button if you wish to execute the initialization.
Press the NO button if you wish to cancel the procedure.
• The display changes to the following.
2. Select CONTROL.
• The display looks similar to the following.
3. Select INITIAL.
• This display changes to the following.
• Initialization begins. When initialization is completed,
“COMPLETED!” is shown on the display and the Keyboard returns to the normal performance mode.
• The USER MIDI and FAVORITES are not initialized by
this procedure.
You can also reset all the PERFORMANCE
items with the following procedure:
Turn off the power to this instrument once.
Then, while pressing the three lower left buttons in the RHYTHM GROUP section
(8BEAT, 16BEAT and USA) at the same time,
turn the power on again.
Power on settings
When the POWER button of this instrument is turned on, the settings below are automatically set to
those suitable for piano performance.
Sound
CONDUCTOR
TRANSPOSE
SYNCHRO & BREAK
AUTO PLAY CHORD
All PART SETTING items for the RIGHT 1 part
PEDAL SETTING
•
GRAND PIANO (CONCERT)
RIGHT 1
C
Off
Off
Appropriate values
SOFT
When you turn the power on, you can recall all the settings which were in effect at the time you turned the instrument off:
while depressing the sustain (right) pedal, turn on the power. (However, this function only works for a few tens of minutes
after the power is turned off.)
133
QQTG0701
17_Initialize.fm 134 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午前11時37分
Connections
(on the rear panel)
MIDI
LINE OUT
AUX IN
OUT
IN
USB
PEDAL IN
AUX IN
Other instruments such as a sound generator
can be connected to this terminal, and the sound
will be output from this instrument’s speakers. To
receive monaural sound, connect the other
instrument to the R/MONO terminal. (Do not connect the L terminal.)
USB
This terminal allows connection to a personal
computer with a USB cable (commercially available type AB cable).
Used with the applications on the included CDROM, you can record this instrument’s audio
sound or manage the instrument data with your
PC.
LINE OUT
By connecting an external high-power amplifier,
the sound can be reproduced at a high volume.
To output monaural sound, connect the external
equipment to the R/MONO terminal. (Do not connect the L terminal.)
• Applications
Audio Recorder:
Application for Recording this instrument’s sounds and
for saving recorded digital audio files in WAV, WMA (Windows Audio Format) and MP3 formats.
Song Manager:
Application for managing this instrument’s data on your
PC by means of a USB cable.
MIDI
These terminals are for connection to another
MIDI instrument. (Refer to page 125.)
(beneath the left end of keyboard)
MIC
MAX
VOLUME
MIN
PHONES
PHONES × 2
Headphones can be connected to this instrument.
•
When headphones are plugged into this jack, the
speakers of this instrument are disabled.
MIC
A microphone can be connected to this instrument and the sound output through the speakers. Use the VOLUME control to adjust the
volume.
•
Effects such as reverb can be applied to the microphone input. (Refer to page 39.)
134
QQTG0701
17_Initialize.fm 135 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午前11時37分
Assembly
Follow the steps below to assemble your Technics piano. Make sure you are using the correct parts and
that they are in the correct direction.
•
•
At least 2 people are required for assembly.
To disassemble the piano, reverse the procedure.
1. Remove the packing and take the parts out of
6. Secure the piano body to the stand.
the carton. Confirm that all the parts on the
printed list are present.
Black
Screw (A)
List
2. The following parts are in the screw kit.
Brass-colored screw............4
Black screw (A) ...................4
Black screw (B) ...................4
Black screw (C) ...................2
3. Affix the right and left side planks to the pedal
(1) Insert 2 screws in the 2 rear screw holes on the underside of the piano body, and turn each screw 5 or 6 times.
Push the piano body forward so that the screws are fully
inserted in the cutout of the metal piece on either side
plank. (This enables you to easily position the piano body
on the stand.)
(2) Adjust the piano body so that the right and left sides
project evenly over the stand.
box.
Pedal cord
(3) Positioning the piano body on the stand, confirm that the
4 screws can easily be inserted.
(4) Tighten the 4 screws securely.
7. Connect the pedal cord and power cord to the
(1) Use the 4 brass-colored screws to secure the planks.
(2) Loosen the pedal cord, stowed on the inner side of the
pedal box, and extend it.
4. Affix the rear panel.
terminals.
mark
PEDAL IN
plug
• Use 2 black screws (C) and 4 black screws (B) to affix the
rear panel.
(C)
(B)
5. Place the piano
body on the stand.
WARNING:
Avoid pinching your fingers.
Note 1
Holding the piano body at
least 10 cm in from the
edge, place it on the
stand so that it does not
fall off.
Note 2
If the piano body is placed too far to the right or left, or to
the front or back, it will become unstable.
With the mark
upwards, insert
the plug fully.
(1) Plug the pedal cord and power cord into the terminals on
the rear of the piano.
(2) Remove the backing from the clamps and affix them as
shown in the figure. Secure the pedal cord to the clamps.
Confirm: After assembling, check these points.
• Are any parts left over?
→ Check the assembly procedure again.
• Does the piano rattle when it is rocked?
→ Make sure all the screws are securely tightened.
• Is the power cord firmly inserted?
→ Check again.
• Is the plug of the pedal cord inserted as far into the connector terminal as it will go?
→ If it is not completely inserted, the sustain and other
pedal functions may not work.
■ When the piano has been moved or transported,
retighten the screws securely.
135
QQTG0701
17_Initialize.fm 136 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午前8時20分
Symptoms which appear to be signs of
trouble
Phenomenon
Sounds and effects
The buttons, keys, etc. malfunction.
Remedy
• Turn off the POWER button once, then turn it on again.
If this procedure is not successful, turn off the POWER
button once. Then, while pressing the three lower left
buttons in the RHYTHM GROUP section (8BEAT,
16BEAT and USA) at the same time, turn the POWER
button on again. (Note that, in this case, all programmable settings, functions and memories return to their
factory-preset status.)
No sound is produced when the keys are • The MAIN VOLUME is at the minimum setting. Adjust
pressed.
the volume with the MAIN VOLUME control.
• The volumes for the selected parts are set to the minimum levels. Use the balance buttons to set the volumes of the relevant parts to appropriate levels. (Refer
to page 27.)
• The part is muted. (Refer to page 27.)
• The LOCAL CONTROL for a part performed on the
keyboard is set to OFF. Set the LOCAL CONTROL to
ON. (Refer to page 128.)
Only percussive instrument sounds are produced • In the SOUND GROUP section, the DRUM KITS butwhen the keyboard is played.
ton is on.
The volume is very low when the keyboard is • The volume setting in the SEQUENCER contents is
played.
very low. Follow the INITIAL procedure to reset the
settings. (Refer to page 133.)
The sound you hear is different from the sound • This sometimes occurs when you play back
you selected.
SEQUENCER or COMPOSER data which was created on a different model, or when MIDI data is
received from a connected instrument. Select the
desired sounds again.
AUTO PLAY
CHORD
Rhythm
The rhythm does not start.
No sound is produced for the automatic accom- • An ACCOMP part does not sound if its corresponding
paniment, or only the sounds of some parts are volume is set to the minimum level. Use the respective
produced.
balance buttons to set the ACCOMP 1–5 volumes to
appropriate levels.
• The APC/SEQUENCER VOLUME is at the minimum
setting. Adjust the volume with the APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME control.
SEQUENCER
Storage is not possible.
136
QQTG0701
• The DRUMS volume is set to the minimum level. Use
the balance buttons to set the DRUMS volume to an
appropriate level.
• A SEQUENCER PLAY button is on. When you are not
playing back the SEQUENCER performance, turn off
the SEQUENCER PLAY button.
• CLOCK is set to MIDI. Set CLOCK to INTERNAL.
(Refer to page 128.)
• The remaining memory capacity of the SEQUENCER
is 0. Follow the SONG CLEAR or TRACK CLEAR procedure to erase the memory. (Refer to page 72.)
The playback measure indication is different from • The number of measures corresponds to the time sigwhen the performance was recorded.
nature of the rhythm selected at the start of recording.
To change the rhythm in the middle of the song, record
the rhythm change in the RHYTHM part. (Refer to
page 69.)
17_Initialize.fm 137 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午前11時37分
COMPOSER
Phenomenon
Remedy
Storage is not possible.
• The remaining memory capacity of the COMPOSER is
0.
Setting the time signature is not possible.
• The time signature cannot be changed for a pattern
which is currently recorded in the COMPOSER. If you
wish to change the time signature, first follow the procedure to clear the memory. (Refer to page 82.)
The playback timing of the rhythm pattern is dif- • The QUANTIZE function was on when the pattern was
ferent from the timing with which it was recorded. recorded and the timing was automatically corrected.
Set the quantize level to a smaller note unit or to OFF
when recording. (Refer to page 84.)
Disk
The Disk Drive produces a noise during recording • This occurs when the Disk Drive is reading a disk. It
or playback.
does not indicate a problem.
When the procedure to load from a disk is per- • When performing the load operation from a disk, the
formed, the contents of the memory are erased.
memory changes to that of the data loaded from the
disk. If you wish to preserve a song which is stored in
the memory, save it on a disk before performing the
load procedure.
Data cannot be exchanged through MIDI termi- • Match the channels on the transmitting side and the
nals.
receiving side. (Refer to page 127.)
• When the USB terminal or both the MIDI IN and OUT
terminals are connected to a computer, depending on
the computer software the received data may be sent
back to the instrument just as it is. Because of this the
sound generated from the keys and the sound generated from the returned data are both produced, causing undesirable effects, such as the sounds canceling
each other out, for example. In this case, either change
the software settings to prevent received data from
being returned, or set the MIDI LOCAL CONTROL to
off.
Noise from a radio or TV can be heard.
• This sometimes occurs when electrical equipment
such as a radio or TV is used near the instrument. Try
moving such electrical equipment further away from
the instrument.
• The sound may be coming from a nearby broadcast
station or amateur radio station. If the sound is bothersome, consult your dealer or service center.
The cabinet becomes warm during use.
• This instrument has a built-in power source that heats
the cabinet to some degree. This is not an indication of
trouble.
Other
MIDI
The sound quavers or is distorted.
137
QQTG0701
17_Initialize.fm 138 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午前11時37分
Error messages
No.
00
01
02
03
05
06
07
08
10
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
138
QQTG0701
Contents
The data on the disk that you are
using is for a different product.
An error has occurred while the disk
was loading.
Please try again!
There is no disk in the Disk Drive.
The file that you tried to load is empty.
An error has occurred while the disk
was saving.
Please try again!
The disk that you are using is write
protected.
Please remove the write protection
and try again.
The disk that you are using is full.
Please use another disk.
An error has occurred while the disk
was formatting. The disk that you are
using may be faulty.
Please try formatting another disk.
The data is already copy protected.
The song you are trying to save is
empty.
This STANDARD MIDI FILE is incompatible with this instrument and cannot
be loaded.
This is not a STANDARD MIDI FILE.
The timebase (PPQ resolution) that
you
tried
to
load
is
not
24/48/96/192/288/384 PPQ.
A problem has occurred with your
SEQUENCER Data.
This might be due to a damaged or
faulty disk.
Memory full
It is necessary to press REC STOP to
complete this procedure.
It is impossible to change the time signature because it has already been
set in the existing tracks.
A rhythm track already exists. It is
impossible to assign two tracks to
rhythm.
It is only possible to change the velocity on a melody track.
It is only possible to merge melody
tracks.
Tracks such as rhythm, chord and
control cannot be merged.
No.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
43
44
46
47
54
55
Contents
It is only possible to copy melody
tracks.
Tracks such as rhythm, chord and
control cannot be copied.
This song is too long to be saved as a
MIDI file.
The MIDI file that you have tried to
load exceeds the memory capacity of
this instrument and cannot be played.
The SEQUENCER memory has been
cleared.
It is not possible to change the time
signature of a COMPOSER pattern
after it has been recorded.
If you want to proceed, you must first
clear the entire COMPOSER pattern.
The time signature of the pattern from
which you are copying is different from
the COMPOSER memory that you are
using.
Either:Change the time signature of
the COMPOSER memory
or:Copy from a pattern that has the
same time signature
Memory full
Select a Track before setting parameters for AUTO PUNCH RECORD.
The file that you are trying to load was
saved on a previous model. It is only
possible to load using the “PERFORMANCE” option.
It is impossible to edit a Drum Kit.
Please select a different sound from
any group except Keyboard Percussion.
It is only possible to insert MELODY
Tracks. Tracks such as RHYTHM,
CHORD and CONTROL cannot be
inserted.
This procedure is not possible with a
composer pattern or the metronome.
Please select a preset rhythm pattern.
It is not possible to record using preset
banks, compile banks, or control
banks. Please select one of the user
banks.
Special tracks such as CHORD
(APC), RHY and CTL exist in the song
from which you are copying and are
incompatible with the destination song
because it is in the GM mode.
17_Initialize.fm 139 ページ 2003年5月19日 月曜日 午前11時37分
No.
56
58
62
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
Contents
AUTO PUNCH recording has been
unsuccessful because SEQUENCER
operation was interrupted before the
PUNCH OUT measure was reached.
The song that you have tried to load
exceeds this instrument’s available
memory and cannot be loaded. The
selected song memory has been
cleared.
The computer connection is not active
because the computer port switch is
set to MIDI. Please turn the power off,
set the switch to the desired setting
and turn the power back on.
Please select the Panel Memory that
you want to name.
It is not possible to use the CHORD
FINDER in this mode. Please select
CHORD FINDER from HOME page or
CHORD STEP RECORD page.
SOLO pads are special pads which
include Chord information. Pleases
use SOLO pads when the rhythm and
accompaniment is playing.
There are no APC or CHORD tracks.
Select and APC track or CHORD
track, and try again.
It is not possible to record directly into
the SOLO pads. Record on the
SEQUENCER and Copy the melody
and chord information into a SOLO
pad.
It is not possible to delete all measures.
It is not possible to insert over 16 measures in a PATTERN.
It is not possible to set the start measure to the measures you set to copy.
139
QQTG0701
18_Index.fm 140 ページ
2003年4月27日 日曜日 午後12時25分
Index
A
ADVANCED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
APC/SEQUENCER VOLUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 62
AUTO PLAY CHORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
B
BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BASIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BRILLIANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
90
52
44
42
38
C
CHORD FINDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
CHORD STEP RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
CHORUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
CLOCK (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
COMPOSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
COMPUTER CONNECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
CONDUCTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
CONTRAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
COUNT INTRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
CUSTOMIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
D
DEMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
DIGITAL DRAWBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
DIGITAL EFFECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
DIRECT PLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
DISPLAY TIME OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
DISPLAY HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
DRUM EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
E
EASY COMPOSER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
EASY EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
EASY REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
F
FADE IN/OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
FAVORITES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
FILL IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
FINGERED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
G
GENERAL MIDI LEVEL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
GLIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
H
Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
I
INITIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
INTRO & ENDING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
K
KEY SCALING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
KEY SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
L
LANGUAGE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
LEFT HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
LFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
LINE OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
LOCAL (MIDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
M
MAIN VOLUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
140
QQTG0701
MASTER TUNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
MEMORY, RHYTHM GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
MEMORY, SOUND GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
MIDI PRESETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
MIDI SETTING LOAD OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
MIXER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
MULTI EFFECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Music stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
MUTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
N
NOTE EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
O
ONE TOUCH PLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
OTHER PARTS/TR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
P
PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
PANEL MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
PART SETTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
PIANIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
PIANO STYLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
PROGRESSIVE PIANIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
PUNCH RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Q
QUANTIZE, COMPOSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
QUANTIZE, SEQUENCER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
R
REALTIME RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
REVERB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
RHYTHM GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
S
SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
SEQUENCER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
SEQUENCER PLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
SEQUENCER RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
SEQUENCER SONG SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
SIMPLE PIANO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SOUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
SOUND ARRANGER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
SOUND EXPLORER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
SOUND EDIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
SOUND GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
SPLIT POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Standard MIDI File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
START/STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
STEP RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
SYNCHRO & BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
T
TAP TEMPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
TECHNI-CHORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
TEMPO/PROGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
TONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
TOUCH SENSITIVITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
TRANSPOSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
U
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
V
VARIATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Volume balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
19_Specifications.fm 141 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後6時55分
Specifications
SX-PR54/M
KEYBOARD
88 KEYS
SOUND GENERATOR
PCM
MAX. POLYPHONY
64 NOTES
SOUNDS
NUMBER OF SOUNDS
1025 SOUNDS (990 SOUNDS +2 ORGAN DRAWBARS + 33 DRUM KITS)
PIANO GROUP
GRAND, UPRIGHT, ELECTRIC, MODERN
SOUND GROUP
STRINGS, VOCAL, GUITAR & HARPSI, BRASS, SAX & WOODWIND,
ORGAN & ACCORDION, SYNTH, BASS, MALLET & ORCH PERC,
WORLD, PIANO MIXTURES, ORCH MIXTURES, DIGITAL DRAWBARS,
DRUM KITS, SOUND EXPLORER
SIMPLE PIANO
嘷
FAVORITES
嘷
PEDAL
DAMPER × 1, PROGRAMMABLE (SOFT) × 1
PROGRESSIVE PIANIST
嘷
TOUCH SENSITIVITY
嘷
DIGITAL EFFECT, MULTI EFFECT, REVERB, CHORUS, BRILLIANCE
CONDUCTOR
RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT
TRANSPOSE
±12 NOTES
RHYTHMS
EFFECT
NUMBER OF
RHYTHMS
128 RHYTHMS × 4 VARIATIONS
RHYTHM GROUP
POP, ROCK, FUNK & SOUL, DISCO, POP BALLAD, BALLAD,
BALLROOM & SHOW, 8BEAT, 16BEAT, USA, WALTZ & TRAD,
JAZZ & SWING, LATIN & WORLD
嘷
METRONOME
CONTROLS
MAIN VOLUME, APC/SEQUENCER VOLUME, BALANCE, MUTE,
START/STOP, INTRO & ENDING 1, INTRO & ENDING 2, FILL IN 1,
FILL IN 2, COUNT INTRO, SYNCHRO & BREAK, TEMPO/PROGRAM,
TAP TEMPO, FADE IN/OUT, SPLIT POINT
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MODE: BASIC, ADVANCED 1, ADVANCED 2, PIANIST
MEMORY, ON BASS, CHORD FINDER, LEFT HOLD
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
嘷
SOUND ARRANGER
嘷
PIANO STYLIST
嘷
ONE TOUCH PLAY
嘷
TECHNI-CHORD
嘷
PANEL MEMORY
3 BANKS × 8
SEQUENCER
16 TRACKS
RESOLUTION: 1/96 PER BEAT
STORAGE CAPACITY: APPROX. 40000 NOTES (10 SONGS MAX.)
INPUT MODES: EASY RECORD, REALTIME RECORD, STEP RECORD
FUNCTIONS: RECORD & EDIT, COPY & PASTE, RANGE EDIT
COMPOSER
8 PARTS: BASS, ACCOMP 1 – 5, DRUMS 1, 2
STORAGE CAPACITY: APPROX. 13000 NOTES
INPUT MODES: REALTIME RECORD, STEP RECORD
FUNCTIONS: EASY COMPOSER, PATTERN COPY,
SEQ TO COMPOSER COPY, LOAD SINGLE COMPOSER
MEMORY: 3 BANKS
DISK
3.5 inch DISK DRIVE for 2HD (1.44MB), 2DD (720KB)
LOAD, SAVE, DIRECT PLAY, SONG MEDLEY, DISK TOOLS,
PREFERENCES
SOUND
PART SETTING, MIXER, MASTAR TUNING, KEY SCALING,
APC REVERB SETTING, TECHNI-CHORD, SOUND LOAD OPTION,
SOUND ARRANGER
141
QQTG0701
19_Specifications.fm 142 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後6時55分
SX-PR54/M
REVERB & EFFECT
MIC REVERB & EFFECT, TONE CONTROL, REVERB, CHORUS, MULTI,
SOUND LOAD OPTION, MIXER
CUSTOMIZE
DISPLAY TIMEOUT, DATA PROTECTION, FAVORITES SETTING, MIDI
SETTING LOAD OPTION, LANGUAGE SETTING, DISK PREFERENCES
CONTROL
INITIAL, PEDAL SETTING, PANEL MEMORY MODE,
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER MODE, FADE IN/OUT SETTING
SOUND EDIT
EASY EDIT, TONE, PITCH, FILTER, AMPLITUDE, LFO, EFFECT,
CONTROLLER
MEMORY: 40, 1 USER DRUM KIT
MIDI
PART SETTING, CONTROL MESSAGES, REALTIME MESSAGES,
COMMON SETTING, INPUT/OUTPUT SETTING, MIDI PRESETS,
MODE SETTING, COMPUTER CONNECTION
DISPLAY
LCD: PAGE, CONTRAST, EXIT, DISPLAY HOLD, OTHER PARTS/TR
嘷
HELP
嘷
DEMO
TERMINALS
PHONES × 2, LINE OUT (R/MONO,L), AUX IN (R/MONO,L), USB,
MIDI (IN, OUT), PEDAL IN, MIC (VOLUME)
OUTPUT
80 W (40 W × 2)
SPEAKERS
14 cm × 2
POWER REQUIREMENT
110 W
AC120/220/230–240V 50/60 Hz
AC120V 60 Hz (NORTH AMERICA AND MEXICO)
AC230–240V 50/60 Hz (EUROPE, AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND)
DIMENSIONS (W × H × D)
139.7 cm × 104.2 cm × 60.1 cm (55 × 41-1/32" × 23-21/32")
NET WEIGHT
55 kg (121.3 lbs)
ACCESSORIES
AC CORD, MUSIC STAND,
CD-ROM (AUDIO RECORDER, SONG MANAGER, USB DRIVER,
PROGRESSIVE PIANIST MUSIC SCORE)
• Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
• In some markets, some models may not be available.
142
QQTG0701
16_Part XI.fm 126 ページ 2003年5月16日 金曜日 午後11時40分
Part XI
MIDI
The following kinds of data can be transmitted/received.
䡲 NOTE data
This is the most basic kind of MIDI data which is
exchanged, and is used to specify which keys
are played and how hard they are played.
䡲 PROGRAM CHANGE
This is sound change data. When a different
sound is selected on the transmitting instrument,
the sound on the receiving instrument also
changes.
NOTE NUMBER: Number specifying which key
is played.
NOTE ON: Specifies that a key is played.
NOTE OFF: Specifies that a key is released.
VELOCITY: Specifies how hard a key is struck.
䡲 CONTROL CHANGE
These are volume, sustain, effect, etc. data used
to enhance performance expression. Each function is distinguished by its control number, and
the function which can be changed by the control
differs depending on the instrument.
• MIDI notes are assigned numbers from 0 to 127, with
middle C (C3) as 60. Note pitches are in semitone increments, with the higher numbers assigned to the higher
pitches.
䡲 EXCLUSIVE data
This is data that is specific to this instrument, and
data for the GENERAL MIDI LEVEL 2 mode setting.
Outline of MIDI functions
AUTO PLAY CHORD
MAIN
VOLUME
MAX
SPLIT
POINT
OFF/ON
MODE
ONE TOUCH
PLAY
FADE
APC/SEQUENCER
VOLUME
IN
RHYTHM GROUP
SOUND
OUT ARRANGER
METRONOME POP
ROCK
FUNK &
SOUL
SOUND GROUP
TEMPO / PROGRAM
DISCO POP BALLAD BALLAD
BALLROOM
& SHOW
STRINGS VOCAL
SEQUENCER
SAX &
ORGAN &
GUITAR &
SOUND
HARPSI BRASS WOODWIND ACCORDION SYNTH EXPLORER
PLAY
EASY
REC FAVORITES
PROGRAM
MENUS
DISK
IN USE
DISK
MAX
SET
CHORD FINDER
PROGRESSIVE
PIANIST
8 BEAT 16 BEAT
PIANO STYLIST
MALLET &
PIANO
ORCH
DIGITAL
BASS ORCH PERC WORLD MIXTURES MIXTURES DRAWBARS DRUM KITS MEMORY
WALTZ JAZZ & LATIN &
& TRAD SWING WORLD MEMORY
USA
CONDUCTOR
LEFT
RIGHT 2
LOAD
CHORD STEP REC
DIGITAL
EFFECT
RIGHT 1
MULTI
EFFECT CHORUS REVERB
CONTRAST
OFF
MIN
LOAD
1
DEMO
MUSIC STYLE ARRANGER
3
2
VARIATION
4
1
2
FILL IN
1
2
INTRO & ENDING
1
SYNCHRO & BREAK
2
3
START / STOP
A
4 BEAT
TAP TEMPO
- TRANSPOSE +
HELP OTHER PARTS/TR
DISPLAY HOLD EXIT
MUTE
SEQUENCER COUNT
RESET INTRO
1. Press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
GRAND
UPRIGHT ELECTRIC MODERN
SIMPLE PIANO
TECHNI-CHORD
BANK
B
P.MEM 5-8
C
SET
1/5
2/6
3/7
4/8
PAGE
PIANO
PANEL MEMORY
3. Select a function.
on.
4. Follow the procedure to adjust the settings.
• The display looks similar to the following.
• While you are adjusting the settings, when the
TEMPO/PROGRAM indicator is lit, it indicates that the
TEMPO/PROGRAM is available for setting the current
function.
5. When you have finished setting the functions,
press the PROGRAM MENUS button to turn it
off.
2. Select MIDI.
MIDI
• The display looks similar to the following.
126
QQTG0701
19_Specifications.fm 143 ページ 2003年5月20日 火曜日 午後6時55分
(For U.S.A.)
PANASONIC CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMPANY,
DIVISION OF MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC CORPORATION OF AMERICA
One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094
PANASONIC SALES COMPANY, DIVISION OF MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC
OF PUERTO RICO, INC.,
Ave. 65 de Infanteria, Km. 9.5
San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina, Puerto Rico 00985
/
Musical Instrument
Products Limited Warranty
Limited Warranty Coverage
If your product does not work properly because of a defect in materials or workmanship, Panasonic
Consumer Electronics Company or Panasonic Sales Company (collectively referred to as “the
warrantor”) will, for the length of the period indicated on the chart below, which starts with the date of
original purchase (“warranty period”), at its option either (a) repair your product with new or refurbished
parts, or (b) replace it with a new or a refurbished product. The decision to repair or replace will be
made by the warrantor.
Product
Organs, Digital Pianos,
Digital Ensemble Series, Tone Cabinets,
Panasonic Digital Pianos
Keyboards
Panasonic Keyboards, Synthesizers,
Sound Modules, Expansion Boards,
Disk Drives, Drum Percussion Units,
MIDI Orchestra, Keyboard Amplifiers,
Foot Pedals, Foot Controllers,
Personal Music PA Systems
USB Reader/Writer, Personal Computer
Card Adapters (in exchange for defective
item)
SD Memory Cards (in exchange for
defective item)
Parts
Labor
Service
Three (3) Years
One (1) Year
In-Home or Carry-In
One (1) Year
One (1) Year
In-Home or Carry-In
One (1) Year
One (1) Year
Carry-In or Mail-In
One (1) Year
Not Applicable
Carry-In or Mail-In
Ninety (90) Days
Not Applicable
Carry-In or Mail-In
In-Home service, if applicable, requires clear, complete and easy access to the product by the
authorized servicer and does not include removal or re-installation of an installed product. It is possible
that certain in-home repairs will not be completed in-home, but will require that the product, or parts of
the product, be removed for shop diagnosis and/or repair and then returned.
Limited Warranty Limits And Exclusions
This warranty ONLY COVERS failures due to defects in materials or workmanship, and DOES NOT
COVER normal wear and tear or cosmetic damage. The warranty ALSO DOES NOT COVER damages
which occurred in shipment, or failures which are caused by products not supplied by the warrantor, or
failures which result from accidents, misuse, abuse, neglect, mishandling, misapplication, alteration,
faulty installation, set-up adjustments, misadjustment of consumer controls, improper maintenance,
power line surge, lightning damage, modification, rental use of the product, service by anyone other
than a Factory Servicenter or other Authorized Servicer, or damage that is attributable to acts of God.
THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES EXCEPT AS LISTED UNDER “LIMITED WARRANTY
COVERAGE”. THE WARRANTOR IS NOT LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH
OF THIS WARRANTY, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOSS OF GOODWILL, PROFITS OR
REVENUE, LOSS OF USE OF THIS PRODUCT OR ANY ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT, COST OF
SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT, DOWNTIME COSTS, OR CLAIMS OF ANY PARTY DEALING WITH
BUYER FOR SUCH DAMAGES. (As examples, this excludes damages for lost time, cost of having
someone remove or re-install an installed unit if applicable, travel to and from the servicer, loss of
media, data or other memory content. The items listed are not exclusive, but are for illustration only.)
ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, ARE LIMITED TO THE PERIOD OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY.
During the “Labor” warranty period there will be no charge for labor. During the “Parts” warranty period,
there will be no charge for parts. You must carry-in or mail-in your product or arrange for in-home
service, as applicable, during the warranty period. If non-rechargeable batteries are included, they are
not warranted. This warranty only applies to products purchased and serviced in the United States or
Puerto Rico. This warranty is extended only to the original purchaser of a new product which was not
sold “as is”. A purchase receipt or other proof of the original purchase date is required for warranty
service.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or
limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the exclusions may not apply to you.
Carry-In, Mail-In or In-Home Service
For Carry-In, Mail-In or In-Home Service (as applicable) in the United States call 1-800-211PANA(7262) or visit the website (http://www.panasonic.com).
For assistance in Puerto Rico call Panasonic Sales Company (787)-750-4300 or fax (787)-768-2910.
PARTS AND SERVICE (INCLUDING COST OF AN IN-HOME SERVICE CALL IF APPLICABLE)
WHICH ARE NOT COVERED BY THIS LIMITED WARRANTY ARE YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have others rights which vary from state
to state. If a problem with this product develops during or after the warranty period, you may contact
your dealer or Servicenter. If the problem is not handled to your satisfaction, then write to the
warrantor's Consumer Affairs Department at the addresses listed for the warrantor.
Customer Services Directory
143
QQTG0701
SX-PR54/M ENGLISH
DIGITAL ENSEMBLE
SX-PR54/M
Operating Instructions
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
Web Site: http://www.panasonic.co.jp/global/
ENGLISH
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read these
instructions completely. Please keep this manual for future reference.
Printed in Japan
QQTG0701
Se0503S0
ENGLISH
This manual was printed
with soy based ink.
QQTG0701
Download PDF

advertising